ASDA-B2_M_EN_20100623

ASDA-B2_M_EN_20100623
ASDA-B2_M_EN_20100623
Preface
Thank you very much for purchasing DELTA’s AC servo products.
This manual will be helpful in the installation, wiring, inspection, and operation of Delta AC
servo drive and motor. Before using the product, please read this user manual to ensure
correct use.
You should thoroughly understand all safety precautions (DANGERS, WARNINGS and STOPS)
before proceeding with the installation, wiring and operation. If you do not understand please
contact your local Delta sales representative. Place this user manual in a safe location for
future reference.
Using This Manual
„ Contents of this manual
This manual is a user guide that provides the information on how to install, operate
and maintain ASDA-B2 series AC servo drives and ECMA series AC servo motors. The
contents of this manual include the following topics:
z
Installation of AC servo drives and motors
z
Configuration and wiring
z
Trial run steps
z
Control functions and adjusting methods of AC servo drives
z
Parameter settings
z
Communication protocol
z
Inspection and maintenance
z
Troubleshooting
z
Application examples
„ Who should use this manual
This manual is intended for the following users:
z
Those who are responsible for designing
z
Those who are responsible for installing or wiring
z
Those who are responsible for operating or programming
z
Those who are responsible for maintaining or troubleshooting
„ Important precautions
Before using the product, please read this user manual thoroughly to ensure correct
use. Store this manual in a safe and handy place for quick reference whenever
necessary. Always observe the following precautions:
z
Do not use the product in a potentially explosive environment.
z
Install the product in a clean and dry location free from corrosive and
inflammable gases or liquids.
Revision June 2010
i
Preface
z
Do not connect commercial power to the U, V, W terminals. Failure to observe
this precaution will cause severe damage to the Servo drive.
z
Ensure that the motor and drive are correctly connected to a ground. The
grounding method must comply with the electrical standard of the country
(Please refer to NFPA 70: National Electrical Code, 2005 Ed.).
z
Do not disconnect the AC servo drive and motor while the power is ON.
z
Do not attach, modify or remove wiring while power is applied to the AC servo
drive.
z
Before starting the operation with a mechanical system connected, make sure
the emergency stop equipment can be energized and work at any time.
z
Do not touch the drive heat sink or the servo motor during operation, this
may cause serious personnel injury.
PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.
Carefully note and observe the following safety precautions when receiving, inspecting,
installing, operating, maintaining and troubleshooting. The following words, DANGER,
WARNING and STOP are used to mark safety precautions when using the Delta’s servo product.
Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty!
ASDA-B2 series drives are open type servo drives and must be installed in an NEMA enclosure
such as a protection control panel during operation to comply with the requirements of the
international safety standards. They are provided with precise feedback control and highspeed calculation function incorporating DSP (Digital Signal Processor) technology, and
intended to drive three-phase permanent magnet synchronous motors (PMSM) to achieve
precise positioning by means of accurate current output generated by IGBT (Insulated Gate
Bipolar Transistor).
ASDA-B2 series drives can be used in industrial applications and for installation in an end-use
enclosure that do not exceed the specifications defined in the ASDA-B2 series user manual
(Drives, cables and motors are for use in a suitable enclosure with a minimum of a UL50 type
1 or NEMA 250 Type 1 rating).
The words, DANGER, WARNING and STOP, have the following meaning:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation and if not avoided, may result in
serious injury or death.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation and if not avoided, may result in
minor to moderate injury or serious damage to the product.
Indicates an improper action that it is not recommended. Doing so may cause
damage or malfunction.
ii
Revision June 2010
Preface
Unpacking Check
¾ Please ensure that both the servo drive and motor are correctly matched for size (power
rating). Failure to observe this precaution may cause fire, seriously damage to the drive
/ motor or cause personal injury.
Installation
¾ Do not install the product in a location that is outside the stated specification for the
drive and motor. Failure to observe this caution may result in electric shock, fire, or
personal injury.
Wiring
¾ Connect the ground terminals to a class-3 ground (Ground resistance should not exceed
100 Ω). Improper grounding may result in electric shock or fire.
¾ Do not connect any power supplies to the U, V, W terminals. Failure to observe this
precaution may result in serious injury, damage to the drive or fire.
¾ Ensure that all screws, connectors and wire terminations are secure on the power supply,
servo drive and motor. Failure to observe this caution may result in damage, fire or
personal injury.
Operation
¾ Before starting the operation with a mechanical system connected, change the drive
parameters to match the user-defined parameters of the mechanical system. Starting the
operation without matching the correct parameters may result in servo drive or motor
damage, or damage to the mechanical system.
¾ Ensure that the emergency stop equipment or device is connected and working correctly
before operating the motor that is connected to a mechanical system.
¾ Do not approach or touch any rotating parts (e.g. shaft) while the motor is running.
Failure to observe this precaution may cause serious personal injury.
¾ In order to prevent accidents, the initial trial run for servo motor should be conducted
under no load conditions (separate the motor from its couplings and belts).
¾ For the initial trial run, do not operate the servo motor while it is connected to its
mechanical system. Connecting the motor to its mechanical system may cause damage or
result in personal injury during the trail run. Connect the servo motor once it has
successfully completed a trail run.
¾ Caution: Please perform trial run without load first and then perform trial run with load
connected. After the servo motor is running normally and regularly without load, then
run servo motor with load connected. Ensure to perform trial run in this order to prevent
unnecessary danger.
¾ Do not touch either the drive heat sink or the motor during operation as they may
become hot and personal injury may result.
Maintenance and Inspection
¾ Do not touch any internal or exposed parts of servo drive and servo motor as electrical
shock may result.
¾ Do not remove the operation panel while the drive is connected to an electrical power
source otherwise electrical shock may result.
¾ Wait at least 10 minutes after power has been removed before touching any drive or
motor terminals or performing any wiring and/or inspection as an electrical charge may
still remain in the servo drive and servo motor with hazardous voltages even after power
has been removed.
¾ Do not disassemble the servo drive or motor as electric shock may result.
¾ Do not connect or disconnect wires or connectors while power is applied to the drive and
motor.
¾ Only qualified personnel who have electrical knowledge should conduct maintenance and
inspection.
Revision June 2010
iii
Preface
Main Circuit Wiring
¾ Install the encoder cables in a separate conduit from the motor power cables to avoid
signal noise. Separate the conduits by 30cm (11.8inches) or more.
¾ Use multi-stranded twisted-pair wires or multi-core shielded-pair wires for signal,
encoder (PG) feedback cables. The maximum length of command input cable is 3m
(9.84ft.) and the maximum length of encoder (PG) feedback cables is 20m (65.62ft.).
¾ As a charge may still remain in the drive with hazardous voltages even after power has
been removed, be sure to wait at least 10 minutes after power has been removed before
performing any wiring and/or inspection.
¾ It is not recommended to frequently power the drive on and off. Do not turn the drive off
and on more than once per minute as high charging currents within the internal
capacitors may cause damage.
Main Circuit Terminal Wiring
¾ Please perform the wiring after the terminal blocks are all removed from the drive.
¾ Insert only one wire into one terminal on the terminal block.
¾ When inserting wires, please ensure that the conductors are not shorted to adjacent
terminals or wires.
¾ Ensure to double check the wiring before applying power to the drive.
¾ If the wiring is in error, perform the wiring again with proper tools. Never use force to
remove the terminals or wires. Otherwise, it may result in malfunction or damage.
NOTE
1) In this manual, actual measured values are in metric units. Dimensions in
(imperial units) are for reference only. Please use metric units for precise
measurements.
2) The content of this manual may be revised without prior notice. Please
consult our distributors or download the most updated version at
http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation.
.
iv
Revision June 2010
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation............................................... 1-1
1.1 Unpacking Check ................................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 Model Explanation .............................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.1
Nameplate Information .............................................................................. 1-2
1.2.2
Model Name Explanation ........................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Servo Drive and Servo Motor Combinations ........................................................ 1-5
1.4 Servo Drive Features ........................................................................................... 1-6
1.5 Control Modes of Servo Drive ............................................................................. 1-7
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage ......................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Installation Notes................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Storage Conditions ............................................................................................. 2-1
2.3 Installation Conditions........................................................................................ 2-2
2.4 Installation Procedure and Minimum Clearances ................................................. 2-3
2.5 Molded-case Circuit Breaker and Fuse Current Recommended Value................... 2-5
2.6 EMI Filter Selection.............................................................................................. 2-6
2.7 Regenerative Resistor ......................................................................................... 2-9
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring......................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Connections ....................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1
Connecting to Peripheral Devices............................................................... 3-1
3.1.2
Servo Drive Connectors and Terminals....................................................... 3-2
3.1.3
Wiring Methods ......................................................................................... 3-5
Revision June 2010
v
Table of Contents
3.1.4
Motor Power Cable Connector Specifications ............................................. 3-7
3.1.5
Encoder Connector Specifications .............................................................. 3-9
3.1.6
Cable Specifications for Servo Drive ........................................................... 3-10
3.2 Basic Wiring ........................................................................................................ 3-12
3.3 Input / Output Interface Connector - CN1 ........................................................... 3-16
3.3.1
CN1 Terminal Identification ....................................................................... 3-16
3.3.2
Signals Explanation of Connector - CN1..................................................... 3-18
3.3.3
User-defined DI and DO signals ................................................................. 3-27
3.3.4
Wiring Diagrams of I/O Signals - CN1 ........................................................ 3-32
3.4 Encoder Connector - CN2.................................................................................... 3-33
3.5 Serial Communication Connector - CN3 .............................................................. 3-34
3.5.1
Terminal Layout and Identification – CN3 .................................................. 3-34
3.5.2
Connection between PC and Connector - CN3............................................ 3-35
3.6 Standard Connection Example ............................................................................ 3-36
3.6.1
Position (PT) Control Mode ........................................................................ 3-36
3.6.2
Speed Control Mode .................................................................................. 3-37
3.6.3
Torque Control Mode................................................................................. 3-38
Chapter 4 Display and Operation ........................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Description of Digital Keypad ............................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Display Flowchart ............................................................................................... 4-2
4.3 Status Display ..................................................................................................... 4-3
vi
4.3.1
Save Setting Display................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.2
Abort Setting Display ................................................................................. 4-3
Revision June 2010
Table of Contents
4.3.3
Fault Message Display ............................................................................... 4-3
4.3.4
Polarity Setting Display .............................................................................. 4-3
4.3.5
Monitor Setting Display ............................................................................. 4-4
4.4 General Function Operation ................................................................................ 4-7
4.4.1
Fault Code Display Operation .................................................................... 4-7
4.4.2
JOG Operation ........................................................................................... 4-8
4.4.3
Force Output Control Operation ................................................................ 4-9
4.4.4
DI Diagnosis Operation.............................................................................. 4-10
4.4.5
DO Diagnosis Operation ............................................................................ 4-11
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure............................................................. 5-1
5.1 Inspection without Load...................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Applying Power to the Drive................................................................................ 5-3
5.3 JOG Trial Run without Load ................................................................................. 5-7
5.4 Speed Trial Run without Load ............................................................................. 5-9
5.5 Tuning Procedure ............................................................................................... 5-11
5.5.1
Tuning Flowchart....................................................................................... 5-12
5.5.2
Load Inertia Estimation Flowchart .............................................................. 5-13
5.5.3
Auto Mode Tuning Flowchart ..................................................................... 5-14
5.5.4
Semi-Auto Mode Tuning Flowchart............................................................. 5-15
5.5.5
Limit of Load Inertia Estimation ................................................................. 5-17
5.5.6
Mechanical Resonance Suppression Method .............................................. 5-19
5.5.7
Relationship between Tuning Modes and Parameters................................. 5-20
5.5.8
Gain Adjustment in Manual Mode .............................................................. 5-21
Revision June 2010
vii
Table of Contents
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation .................................................................. 6-1
6.1 Control Modes of Operation................................................................................ 6-1
6.2 Position Control Mode ........................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.1
Command Source of Position (PT) Control Mode ........................................ 6-2
6.2.2
Structure of Position Control Mode ............................................................ 6-4
6.2.3
Electronic Gear Ratio.................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.4
Low-pass Filter........................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.5
Position Loop Gain Adjustment.................................................................. 6-7
6.3 Speed Control Mode ........................................................................................... 6-10
6.3.1
Command Source of Speed Control Mode .................................................. 6-10
6.3.2
Structure of Speed Control Mode ............................................................... 6-11
6.3.3
Smoothing Strategy of Speed Control Mode ............................................... 6-12
6.3.4
Analog Speed Input Scaling ....................................................................... 6-16
6.3.5
Timing Chart of Speed Control Mode ......................................................... 6-17
6.3.6
Speed Loop Gain Adjustment..................................................................... 6-18
6.3.7
Resonance Suppression ............................................................................. 6-25
6.4 Torque Control Mode.......................................................................................... 6-32
6.4.1
Command Source of Torque Control Mode ................................................ 6-32
6.4.2
Structure of Torque Control Mode ............................................................. 6-33
6.4.3
Smoothing Strategy of Torque Control Mode ............................................. 6-34
6.4.4
Analog Torque Input Scaling...................................................................... 6-34
6.4.5
Timing Chart of Torque Control Mode ....................................................... 6-35
6.5 Control Mode Selection....................................................................................... 6-36
viii
Revision June 2010
Table of Contents
6.5.1
Speed / Position Control Mode Selection.................................................... 6-36
6.5.2
Speed / Torque Control Mode Selection..................................................... 6-37
6.5.3
Torque / Position Control Mode Selection.................................................. 6-37
6.6 Others ................................................................................................................ 6-38
6.6.1
Speed Limit................................................................................................ 6-38
6.6.2
Torque Limit.............................................................................................. 6-38
6.6.3
Analog Monitor.......................................................................................... 6-39
6.6.4
Electromagnetic Brake ............................................................................... 6-42
Chapter 7 Parameters ............................................................................................ 7-1
7.1 Definition ........................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Parameter Summary............................................................................................ 7-2
7.3 Detailed Parameter Listings ................................................................................ 7-11
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications ..................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Communication Hardware Interface .................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Communication Parameter Settings .................................................................... 8-4
8.3 MODBUS Communication Protocol ...................................................................... 8-8
8.4 Communication Parameter Write-in and Read-out ............................................... 8-16
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection .................................................................. 9-1
9.1 Basic Inspection .................................................................................................. 9-1
9.2 Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 9-2
9.3 Life of Replacement Components........................................................................ 9-3
Chapter 10
Troubleshooting ................................................................................ 10-1
10.1 Fault Messages Table ........................................................................................ 10-1
Revision June 2010
ix
Table of Contents
10.2 Potential Cause and Corrective Actions ............................................................. 10-3
10.3 Clearing Faults.................................................................................................. 10-11
Chapter 11
Specifications..................................................................................... 11-1
11.1 Specifications of Servo Drive (ASDA-B2 Series)................................................... 11-1
11.2 Specifications of Servo Motor (ECMA Series) ...................................................... 11-3
11.3 Servo Motor Speed-Torque Curves .................................................................... 11-8
11.4 Overload Characteristics ................................................................................... 11-9
11.5 Dimensions of Servo Drive ................................................................................ 11-11
11.6 Dimensions of Servo Motor ............................................................................... 11-15
Appendix A
x
Accessories ........................................................................................ A-1
Revision June 2010
Table of Contents
About this Manual…
User Information
Be sure to store this manual in a safe place.
Due to constantly growing product range, technical improvement, alteration or changed texts,
figures and diagrams, we reserve the right to make information changes within this manual
without prior notice.
Coping or reproducing any part of this manual, without written consent of Delta Electronics
Inc. is prohibited.
Technical Support and Service
You are welcome to contact our Technical Support Team at the below numbers or visit our
web site (http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/) if you need technical support,
service, information, or if you have any questions in the use of this product. We look forward
to serving your needs and are willing to offer our best support and service to you.
ASIA
JAPAN
DELTA ELECTRONICS, INC.
DELTA ELECTRONICS (JAPAN), INC.
Taoyuan Plant 1
Tokyo Office
31-1, XINGBANG ROAD,
DELTA SHIBADAIMON BUILDING
GUISHAN INDUSTRIAL ZONE,
2-1-14 SHIBADAIMON, MINATO-KU,
TAOYUAN COUNTY 33370, TAIWAN, R.O.C.
TOKYO, 105-0012, JAPAN
TEL: 886-3-362-6301
TEL: 81-3-5733-1111
FAX: 886-3-362-7267
FAX: 81-3-5733-1211
NORTH/SOUTH AMERICA
EUROPE
DELTA PRODUCTS CORPORATION (USA)
DELTRONICS (THE NETHERLANDS) B.V.
Raleigh Office
Eindhoven Office
P.O. BOX 12173
DE WITBOGT 15, 5652 AG EINDHOVEN,
5101 DAVIS DRIVE,
THE NETHERLANDS
RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK, NC 27709,
TEL: 31-40-259-2850
U.S.A.
FAX: 31-40-259-2851
TEL: 1-919-767-3813
FAX: 1-919-767-3969
Revision June 2010
xi
Table of Contents
This page intentionally left blank.
xii
Revision June 2010
Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation
1.1 Unpacking Check
After receiving the AC servo drive, please check for the following:
„ Ensure that the product is what you have ordered.
Verify the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part number of
your order (Please refer to Section 1.2 for details about the model explanation).
„ Ensure that the servo motor shaft rotates freely.
Rotate the motor shaft by hand; a smooth rotation will indicate a good motor. However, a
servo motor with an electromagnetic brake can not be rotated manually.
„ Check for damage.
Inspect the unit to insure it was not damaged during shipment.
„ Check for loose screws.
Ensure that all necessary screws are tight and secure.
If any items are damaged or incorrect, please inform the distributor whom you purchased the
product from or your local Delta sales representative.
A complete and workable AC servo system should include the following parts:
Part I : Delta standard supplied parts
(1)
Servo drive
(2)
Servo motor
(3)
5 PIN Terminal Block (for L1c, L2c, R, S, T)
(4)
3 PIN Terminal Block (for U, V, W)
(5)
4 PIN Terminal Block (for P , D, C,
(6)
One operating lever (for wire to terminal block insertion)
(7)
One jumper bar (installed at pins P
(8)
Instruction Sheets
)
and D of the 3 PIN Terminal Block for P , D, C)
Part II : Optional parts (Refer to Appendix A)
(1)
One power cable, which is used to connect servo motor to U, V, W terminals of servo
drive. This power cable includes a green grounding cable. Please connect the green
grounding cable to the ground terminal of the servo drive.
Revision June 2010
1-1
Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation
(2)
One encoder cable, which is used to connect the encoder of servo motor to the CN2
terminal of servo drive.
(3)
CN1 Connector: 4 PIN Connector (3M type analog product)
(4)
CN2 Connector: 9 PIN Connector (3M type analog product)
(5)
CN3 Connector: 6 PIN Connector (IEEE1394 analog product)
1.2 Model Explanation
1.2.1 Nameplate Information
ASDA-B2 Series Servo Drive
„
Nameplate Explanation
„
Serial Number Explanation
ASMT Series Servo Motor
1-2
„
Nameplate Explanation
„
Serial Number Explanation
Revision June 2010
Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation
1.2.2 Model Name Explanation
ASDA-B2 Series Servo Drive
Revision June 2010
1-3
Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation
ECMA Series Servo Motor
1-4
Revision June 2010
Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation
1.3 Servo Drive and Servo Motor Combinations
The table below shows the possible combination of Delta ASDA-B2 series servo drives and
ECMA series servo motors. The boxes (…) in the model names are for optional configurations.
(Please refer to Section 1.2 for model explanation)
Power
Servo Drive
100W
ASD-B2-0121-B
ECMA-C20401…S(S=8mm)
200W
ASD-B2-0221-B
ECMA-C20602…S(S=14mm)
ASD-B2-0421-B
ECMA-C20604…S (S=14mm)
ECMA-CM0604…S (S=14mm)
ECMA-C20804…7 (7=14mm)
ECMA-E21305…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-G21303…S (S=22mm)
ASD-B2-0721-B
ECMA-C20807…S (S=19mm)
ECMA-C20907…S (S=16mm)
ECMA-G21306…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-GM1306…S (S=22mm)
1000W
ASD-B2-1021-B
ECMA-C21010…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-C20910…S (S=16mm)
ECMA-E21310…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-G21309…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-GM1309…S (S=22mm)
1500W
ASD-B2-1521-B
ECMA-E21315…S (S=22mm)
2000W
ASD-B2-2023-B
ECMA-C21020…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-E21320…S (S=22mm)
ECMA-E21820…S (S=35mm)
3000W
ASD-B2-3023-B
ECMA-E21830…S (S=35mm)
ECMA-F21830…S (S=35mm)
400W
750W
Servo Motor
The servo drives shown in the above table are designed for use in combination with the
specific servo motors. Check the specifications of the drives and motors you want to use.
Also, please ensure that both the servo drive and motor are correctly matched for size (power
rating). If the power of motor and drive is not within the specifications, the drive and motor
may overheat and servo alarm would be activated. For the detail specifications of servo drives
and motors, please refer to Chapter 11 “Specifications”.
The drives shown in the above table are designed according to the three multiple of rated
current of motors shown in the above table. If the drives which are designed according to the
six multiple of rated current of motors are needed, please contact our distributors or your
local Delta sales representative.
Revision June 2010
1-5
Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation
1.4 Servo Drive Features
1-6
Revision June 2010
Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation
1.5 Control Modes of Servo Drive
The Delta Servo provides six single and five dual modes of operation.
Their operation and description is listed in the following table.
Mode
External Position Control
Speed Control
Single
Mode
Internal Speed Control
Torque Control
Code
Description
P
External Position control mode for the servo motor
is achieved via an external pulse command.
S
(External / Internal) Speed control mode for the
servo motor can be achieved via parameters set
within the controller or from an external analog -10
~ +10 VDC command. Control of the internal speed
mode is via the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of
three speeds can be stored internally).
Sz
Internal Speed control mode for the servo motor is
only achieved via parameters set within the
controller. Control of the internal speed mode is via
the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of three speeds
can be stored internally).
T
(External / Internal) Torque control mode for the
servo motor can be achieved via parameters set
within the controller or from an external analog -10
~ +10 VDC command. Control of the internal torque
mode is via the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of
three torque levels can be stored internally).
Tz
Internal Torque control mode for the servo motor is
only achieved via parameters set within the
controller. Control of the internal torque mode is
via the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of three
torque levels can be stored internally).
S-P
Either S or P control mode can be selected via the
Digital Inputs (DI)
T-P
Either T or P control mode can be selected via the
Digital Inputs (DI)
S-T
Either S or T control mode can be selected via the
Digital Inputs (DI)
Internal Torque Control
Dual Mode
The above control modes can be accessed and changed via parameter P1-01. Enter the new
control mode via P1-01 then switch the main power to the servo drive OFF then ON. The new
control mode will only be valid after the drives main power is switched OFF then ON. Please
see safety precautions on page iii (switching drive off/on multiple times).
Revision June 2010
1-7
Chapter 1 Unpacking Check and Model Explanation
This page intentionally left blank.
1-8
Revision June 2010
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
2.1 Installation Notes
Please pay close attention to the following installation notes:
„ Do not bend or strain the connection cables between servo drive and motor.
„ When mounting the servo drive, make sure to tighten all screws to secure the drive in
place.
„ If the servo motor shaft is coupled directly to a rotating device ensure that the alignment
specifications of the servo motor, coupling, and device are followed. Failure to do so may
cause unnecessary loads or premature failure to the servo motor.
„ If the length of cable connected between servo drive and motor is more than 20m, please
increase the wire gauge of the encoder cable and motor connection cable (connected to U,
V, W terminals).
„ Make sure to tighten the screws for securing motor.
2.2 Storage Conditions
The product should be kept in the shipping carton before installation. In order to retain the
warranty coverage, the AC servo drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used for
an extended period of time. Some storage suggestions are:
„ Store in a clean and dry location free from direct sunlight.
„ Store within an ambient temperature range of -20°C to +65°C (-4°F to 149°F).
„ Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing.
„ Do not store in a place subjected to corrosive gases and liquids.
„ Store in original packaging and placed on a solid surface.
Revision June 2010
2-1
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
2.3 Installation Conditions
Operating Temperature
ASDA-B2 Series Servo Drive :
0°C to 55°C (32°F to 131°F)
ECMA Series Servo Motor
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)
:
The ambient temperature of servo drive should be under 45°C (113°F) for long-term
reliability.
If the ambient temperature of servo drive is greater than 45°C (113°F), please install the drive
in a well-ventilated location and do not obstruct the airflow for the cooling fan.
Caution
The servo drive and motor will generate heat. If they are installed in a control panel, please
ensure sufficient space around the units for heat dissipation.
Pay particular attention to vibration of the units and check if the vibration has impacted the
electric devices in the control panel. Please observe the following precautions when selecting
a mounting location. Failure to observe the following precautions may void the warranty!
„ Do not mount the servo drive or motor adjacent to heat-radiating elements or in direct
sunlight.
„ Do not mount the servo drive or motor in a location subjected to corrosive gases, liquids,
airborne dust or metallic particles.
„ Do not mount the servo drive or motor in a location where temperatures and humidity will
exceed specification.
„ Do not mount the servo drive or motor in a location where vibration and shock will exceed
specification.
„ Do not mount the servo drive or motor in a location where it will be subjected to high
levels of electromagnetic radiation.
2-2
Revision June 2010
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
2.4
Installation Procedure and Minimum Clearances
Installation Procedure
Incorrect installation may result in a drive malfunction or premature failure of the drive and or
motor. Please follow the guidelines in this manual when installing the servo drive and motor.
The ASDA-B2 servo drives should be mounted perpendicular to the wall or in the control panel.
In order to ensure the drive is well ventilated, ensure that the all ventilation holes are not
obstructed and sufficient free space is given to the servo drive. Do not install the drive in a
horizontal position or malfunction and damage will occur.
Drive Mounting
The ASDA-B2 servo drives must be back mounted vertically on a dry and solid surface such as
a NEMA enclosure. A minimum spacing of two inches must be maintained above and below
the drive for ventilation and heat dissipation. Additional space may be necessary for wiring
and cable connections. Also, as the drive conducts heat away via the mounting, the mounting
plane or surface should not conduct heat into the drive from external sources
Motor Mounting
The ECMA servo motors should be mounted firmly to a dry and solid mounting surface to
ensure maximum heat transfer for maximum power output and to provide a good ground.
For the dimensions and weights specifications of servo drive or motor, please refer to Chapter
11 “Specifications".
Minimum Clearances
Install a fan to increase ventilation to avoid ambient temperatures that exceed the
specification. When installing two or more drives adjacent to each other please follow the
clearances as shown in the following diagram.
Revision June 2010
2-3
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
„ Minimum Clearances
„ Side by Side Installation
2-4
Revision June 2010
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
2.5
Molded-case Circuit Breaker and Fuse Current Recommended Value
¾ Caution: Please use molded-case circuit breaker and fuse which are recognized by and
comply with the UL or CSA standards.
Servo Drive Model
Recommended Breaker
Recommended Fuse (Class T)
Operation Mode
General
General
ASD-B2-0121-B
5A
5A
ASD-B2-0221-B
5A
6A
ASD-B2-0421-B
10A
10A
ASD-B2-0721-B
10A
20A
ASD-B2-1021-B
15A
25A
ASD-B2-1521-B
20A
40A
ASD-B2-2023-B
30A
50A
ASD-B2-3023-B
30A
70A
Revision June 2010
2-5
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
2.6
EMI Filter Selection
AC Servo Drive - EMI Filter Cross Reference
Item
Power
Servo Drive Model
Recommended EMI Filter
FootPrint
1
100W
ASD-B2-0121-B
08TDT1W4S
N
2
200W
ASD-B2-0221-B
08TDT1W4S
N
3
400W
ASD-B2-0421-B
08TDT1W4S
N
4
750W
ASD-B2-0721-B
20TDT1W4D
N
5
1000W
ASD-B2-1021-B
20TDT1W4D
N
6
1500W
ASD-B2-1521-B
20TDT1W4D
N
7
2000W
ASD-B2-2023-B
20TDT1W4D
N
8
3000W
ASD-B2-3023-B
20TDT1W4D
N
Installation
All electrical equipment, including AC servo drives, will generate high-frequency/lowfrequency noise and will interfere with peripheral equipment by radiation or conduction when
in operation. By using an EMI filter with correct installation, much of the interference can be
eliminated. It is recommended to use Delta’s EMI filter to have the best interference
elimination performance.
We assure that it can comply with following rules when AC servo drive and EMI filter are
installed and wired according to user manual:
„ EN61000-6-4 (2001)
„ EN61800-3 (2004) PDS of category C2
„ EN55011+A2 (2007) Class A Group 1
General Precaution
To ensure the best interference elimination performance when using Delta’s EMI filter, please
follow the guidelines in this user manual to perform wiring and/or installation. In addition,
please also observe the following precautions:
„ EMI filter and AC servo drive should be installed on the same metal plate.
„ Please install AC servo drive on same footprint with EMI filter or install EMI filter as close
as possible to the AC servo drive.
„ All wiring should be as short as possible.
„ Metal plate should be grounded.
„ The cover of EMI filter and AC servo drive or grounding should be fixed on the metal plate
and the contact area should be as large as possible.
2-6
Revision June 2010
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
Choose Suitable Motor Cable and Precautions
Improper installation and choice of motor cable will affect the performance of EMI filter. Be
sure to observe the following precautions when selecting motor cable.
„ Use the cable with shielding (double shielding is the best).
„ The shielding on both ends of the motor cable should be grounded with the minimum
length and maximum contact area.
„ Remove any paint on metal saddle for good ground contact with the plate and shielding
(Please refer to Figure 1 below).
„ The connection between the metal saddle and the shielding on both ends of the motor
cable should be correct and well installed. Please refer to Figure 2 on next page for
correct wiring method.
Figure 1
Saddle on both ends
Saddle on one end
Figure 2
Revision June 2010
2-7
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
Dimensions
Delta Part Number: 08TDT1W4S
Delta Part Number: 20TDT1W4D
2-8
Revision June 2010
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
2.7
Regenerative Resistor
Built-in Regenerative Resistor
When the output torque of servo motor in reverse direction of motor rotation speed, it
indicates that there is a regenerative power returned from the load to the servo drive. This
power will be transmitted into the capacitance of DC Bus and result in rising voltage. When
the voltage has risen to some high voltage, the servo system need to dissipate the extra
energy by using a regenerative resistor. ASDA-B2 series servo drive provides a built-in
regenerative resistor and the users also can connect to external regenerative resistor if more
regenerative capacity is needed.
The following table shows the specifications of the servo drive’s built-in regenerative resistor
and the amount of regenerative power (average value) that it can process.
Built-in Regenerative Resistor Specifications
Servo Drive Resistance (Ohm)
Capacity (Watt)
(kW)
(parameter P1-52) (parameter P1-53)
Regenerative Power
processed by built-in
regenerative resistor
(Watt) *1
Min. Allowable
Resistance
(Ohm)
0.1
--
--
--
60
0.2
--
--
--
60
0.4
--
--
--
60
0.75
100
60
30
60
1.0
40
60
30
30
1.5
40
60
30
30
2.0
40
60
60
15
3.0
40
60
60
15
*1 Regenerative Power Calculation: The amount of regenerative power (average value) that
can be processed is rated at 50% of the capacity of the servo drive's built-in regenerative
resistor. The regenerative power calculation method of external regenerative resistor is the
same.
When the regenerative power exceeds the processing capacity of the servo drive, install an
external regenerative resistor. Please pay close attention on the following notes when using a
regenerative resistor.
1. Make sure that the settings of resistance (parameter P1-52) and capacity (parameter P153) is set correctly.
2. When the users want to install an external regenerative resistor, ensure that its
resistance value is the same as the resistance of built-in regenerative resistor. If
combining multiple small-capacity regenerative resistors in parallel to increase the
regenerative resistor capacity, make sure that the resistance value of the regenerative
resistor should comply with the specifications listed in the above table.
3. In general, when the amount of regenerative power (average value) that can be
processed is used at or below the rated load ratio, the resistance temperature will
Revision June 2010
2-9
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
increase to 120°C or higher (on condition that when the regeneration continuously
occurred). For safety reasons, forced air cooling is good way that can be used to reduce
the temperature of the regenerative resistors. We also recommend the users to use the
regenerative resistors with thermal switches. As for the load characteristics of the
regenerative resistors, please check with the manufacturer.
External Regenerative Resistor
When using external regenerative resistor, connect it to P and C, and make sure the circuit
between P and D is open. We recommend the users should use the external regenerative
resistor that the resistance value following the above table (Built-in Regenerative Resistor
Specifications). We ignore the dissipative power of IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor) in
order to let the users easily calculate the capacity of regenerative resistor. In the following
sections, we will describe Regenerative Power Calculation Method and Simple Calculation
Method for calculating the regenerative power capacity of external regenerative resistors.
Regenerative Power Calculation Method
(1) Without Load
When there is no external load torque, if the servo motor repeats operation, the returned
regenerative power generated when braking will transmitted into the capacitance of DC
bus. After the capacitance voltage exceeds some high value, regenerative resistor can
dissipate the remained regenerative power. Use the table and procedure described below
to calculate the regenerative power.
Rotor Inertia
J (× 10-4kg.m2)
Regenerative power
from empty load
3000r/min to stop
Eo (joule)
Max. regenerative
power of
capacitance
Ec(joule)
0.1 ECMA-C20401……
0.037
0.18
3
0.2 ECMA-C20602……
0.177
0.87
4
ECMA-C20604……
ECMA-C20804……
0.277
0.68
1.37
3.36
8
0.75 ECMA-C20807……
1.13
5.59
14
1.0 ECMA-C21010……
2.65
13.1
18
2.0 ECMA-C21020……
4.45
22.0
21
0.4 ECMA-E21305……
8.17
40.40
8
1.0 ECMA-E21310……
8.41
41.59
18
Medium 1.5 ECMA-E21315……
Inertia
ECMA-E21320……
2.0
ECMA-E21820……
11.18
55.28
18
14.59
34.68
72.15
171.50
21
3.0 ECMA-E21830……
54.95
271.73
28
Servo Drive
(kW)
Low
Inertia
2-10
0.4
Servo Motor
Revision June 2010
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
Servo Drive
(kW)
Servo Motor
Rotor Inertia
J (× 10-4kg.m2)
Regenerative power
from empty load
3000r/min to stop
Eo (joule)
Max. regenerative
power of
capacitance
Ec(joule)
8.17
40.40
8
8.41
41.59
14
11.18
55.29
18
0.4 ECMA-G21303……
High
0.75 ECMA-G21306……
Inertia
1.0 ECMA-G21309……
Eo = J x wr2/182 (joule)
, Wr : r/min
If the load inertia is N × motor inertia, the regenerative power will be (N+1) x E0 when
servo motor brakes from 3000r/min to 0. Then, the regenerative resistor can dissipate:
(N+1) x E0 - Ec (joule). If the time of repeat operation cycle is T sec, then the regenerative
power = 2 x ((N+1) x E0 - Ec) / T.
The calculating procedure is as follows:
Step
Procedure
Equation and Setting Method
1
Set the capacity of
regenerative resistor to the
maximum
Change the value of P1-53 to maximum
2
Set the operation cycle T
Input by the users
3
Set motor speed wr
Input by the users or read via P0-02 Drive State
Display
4
Set load/motor inertia ratio N
Input by the users or read via P0-02 Drive State
Display
5
Calculate the max.
regenerative power Eo
Eo = J x wr2/182
6
Set the regenerative power Ec
that can be absorbed
Refer to the table above
7
Calculate the required
regenerative power capacity
2 x (N+1) x Eo-Ec)/ T
For example:
If we use 400W servo drive, the time of repeat operation cycle is T = 0.4 sec, max. motor
speed is 3000r/min, the load inertia = 7 × motor inertia, then the necessary the power of
regenerative resistor = 2 x ( (7+1) × 1.68 - 8) / 0.4 = 27.2W. If the calculation result is
smaller than regenerative power, we recommend the users to use the built-in 60W
regenerative resistor. Usually the built-in regenerative resistor provided by ASDA-B2 series
can meet the requirement of general application when the external load inertia is not
excessive.
The users can see when the capacity of regenerative resistor is too small, the accumulated
power will be larger and the temperature will also increase. The fault, ALE05 may occur if
the temperature is over high. The following figure shows the actual operation of
regenerative resistor.
Revision June 2010
2-11
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
(2) With Load
When there is an external load torque, servo motor is in reverse rotation when external
load greater than motor torque. Servo motor is usually in forward rotation and the motor
torque output direction is the same as the rotation direction. However, there is still some
special condition. If the motor output torque is in the reverse direction of rotation, the
servo motor is also in the reverse direction of rotation. The external power is input into
the servo drive through servo motor. The figure below is an example. The users can see
the motor is in forward rotation at constant speed when a sudden external load torque
change and great power is transmitted to regenerative resistor rapidly.
Motor Rotation Speed
External Load Torque
Motor Output Torque
Reverse
Rotation
Forward
Rotation
External load torque in reverse direction: TL x Wr
Reverse
Rotation
Forward
Rotation
TL : External load torque
For the safety, we strongly recommend the users should select the proper resistance value
according to the load.
For example:
When external load torque is a +70% rated torque and rotation speed reaches 3000r/min,
if using 400W servo drive (rated torque: 1.27Nt-m), then the users need to connect a
external regenerative resistor which power is 2 x (0.7 x 1.27) x (3000 x 2 x π/ 60) = 560W,
40Ω.
2-12
Revision June 2010
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
Simple Calculation Method
The users can select the adequate regenerative resistors according to the allowable frequency
required by actual operation and the allowable frequency when the servo motor runs without
load. The allowable frequency when the servo motor run without load is the maximum
frequency that can be operated during continuous operation when servo motor accelerate
from 0r/min to rated speed and decelerate from rated speed down to 0r/min. The allowable
frequencies when the servo motor run without load are summarized in the following table.
Allowable Frequencies for Servo Motor Running Without Load (times/min)
When Using Built-in Regenerative Resistor
Motor Capacity 600W
ECMA Series
06
750W
900W
1.0kW
1.5kW
2.0kW
2.0kW
3.0kW
07
09
10
15
20
20
30
83
(F100)
ECMA□□C
-
312
-
137
-
ECMA□□E
-
-
-
42
32
24
(F130)
10
(F180)
11
ECMA□□G
42
-
31
-
-
-
-
-
-
( ) : motor frame size, unit is in millimeters.
When the servo motor runs with load, the allowable frequency will change according to
the changes of the load inertia and rotation speed. Use the following equation to calculate
the allowable frequency.
Allowable fr equency =
Allowable frequency when serv o motor run without load
m+1
x
Rated s peed
Operating speed
2
times
mi n.
m = load/motor inertia ratio
Revision June 2010
2-13
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
The users can select the adequate regenerative resistors according to the allowable
frequency by referring to the table below:
Allowable Frequencies for Servo Motor Running Without Load (times/min)
When Using External Regenerative Resistor
ECMA……C
Motor Capacity
100W
200W
400W
(F60)
400W
(F80)
750W
1.0kW
2.0kW
01
02
04
04
07
10
20
BR400W040 (400W 40Ω)
-
-
8608
3506
2110
925
562
BR1K0W020 (1kW 20Ω)
-
-
-
8765
5274
2312
1406
Delta External
Regenerative Resistor
ECMA……E
Motor Capacity
0.5kW
1kW
1.5kW
2.0kW
2.0kW
3.0kW
05
1.0
15
20
20
30
BR400W040 (400W 40Ω)
291
283
213
163
(F130)
68
(F180)
-
BR1K0W020 (1kW 20Ω)
729
708
533
408
171
-
BR3K0W010 (1kW 10Ω)
-
-
-
-
-
331
Delta External
Regenerative Resistor
ECMA……G
Motor Capacity
0.3kW
0.6kW
0.9kW
03
06
09
BR400W040 (400W 40Ω)
292
283
213
BR1K0W020 (1kW 20Ω)
729
708
533
Delta External
Regenerative Resistor
( ) : motor frame size, unit is in millimeters.
When the regenerative resistor capacity is not enough, the users can connect to multiple
the same capacity regenerative resistors in parallel to increase it.
2-14
Revision June 2010
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
Dimensions
Delta Part Number:BR400W040(400W 40Ω)
L1
L2
H
D
W
MAX. WEIGHT(g)
265
250
30
5.3
60
930
Delta Part Number:BR1K0W020(1kW 20Ω)
L1
400
Revision June 2010
L2
385
H
50
D
5.3
W
100
MAX. WEIGHT(g)
2800
2-15
Chapter 2 Installation and Storage
NOTE
Regarding the selection of regenerative resistor, please refer to the table of regenerative
resistor specifications described in Appendix A.
2-16
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
This chapter provides information on wiring ASDA-B2 series products, the descriptions of I/O
signals and gives typical examples of wiring diagrams.
3.1 Connections
3.1.1 Connecting to Peripheral Devices
Revision June 2010
3-1
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.1.2 Servo Drive Connectors and Terminals
Terminal
Identification
L1c, L2c
R, S, T
(for 220V
models)
Terminal
Description
Notes
Control circuit
terminal
Used to connect single-phase AC control circuit
power. (Control circuit uses the same voltage as the
main circuit.)
Main circuit
terminal
Used to connect single-phase or three-phase AC
main circuit power depending on connecting servo
drive model.
Used to connect servo motor
U, V, W
FG (
)
Servo motor
output
Terminal
Symbol
Wire Color
U
Red
V
White
W
Black
FG(
P , D, C,
Green
Connecting to
three-phase
motor main
circuit cable.
Connecting to
ground terminal
(
) of the
servo drive.
Internal
resistor
Ensure the circuit is closed
between P and D, and the circuit
is open between P and C.
External
resistor
Connect regenerative resistor to
P and C, and ensure an open
circuit between P and D.
External
braking unit
Connect braking unit to P and ,
and ensure an open circuit
between P and D, and P and C.
(N terminal is built in L1c, L2c, ,
and R, S, T.)
P : Connecting to (+) terminal of
V_BUS voltage.
: Connecting to (-) terminal of
V_BUS voltage.
Regenerative
resistor terminal
or braking unit
two places Ground terminal
3-2
)
Description
Used to connect grounding wire of power supply
and servo motor.
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Terminal
Identification
Terminal
Description
I/O connector
CN1
Notes
Used to connect external controllers. Please refer to
section 3.3 for details.
Used to connect encoder of servo motor. Please
refer to section 3.4 for details.
Encoder
connector
CN2
Terminal
Symbol
Wire Color
PIN No.
T+
Blue
4
T-
Blue/Black
5
Reserved
-
3
Reserved
-
2
Reserved
-
1
Reserved
-
9
+5V
Red & Bed/White
8
GND
Black & Black/White
6,7
CN3
Communication
connector
Used to connect PC or keypad. Please refer to
section 3.5 for details.
CN4
Reserved
connector
Reserved
Analog voltage
output terminal
CN5
Used to monitor the operation status. The drive
provides two channels, MON1 and MON2 to output
the analog voltage data. Output voltage is reference
to the power ground (GND).
NOTE
1) U, V ,W , CN1, CN2, CN3 terminals provide short circuit protection.
Revision June 2010
3-3
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Wiring Notes
Please observe the following wiring notes while performing wiring and touching any
electrical connections on the servo drive or servo motor.
1.
Ensure to check if the power supply and wiring of the "power" terminals (R, S, T,
L1c, L2c, U, V, & W) is correct.
2.
Please use shielded twisted-pair cables for wiring to prevent voltage coupling and
eliminate electrical noise and interference.
3.
As a residual hazardous voltage may remain inside the drive, please do not
immediately touch any of the "power" terminals (R, S, T, L1c, L2c, U, V, & W) and/or
the cables connected to them after the power has been turned off and the charge
LED is lit. (Please refer to the Safety Precautions on page ii).
4.
The cables connected to R, S, T and U, V, W terminals should be placed in separate
conduits from the encoder or other signal cables. Separate them by at least 30cm
(11.8 inches).
5.
If the encoder cable is too short, please use a twisted-shield signal wire with
grounding conductor. The wire length should be 20m (65.62ft.) or less. For lengths
greater than 20m (65.62ft.), the wire gauge should be doubled in order to lessen
any signal attenuation. Regarding the specifications of 20m (65.62ft.) encoder
cable, please choose wire gauge AWG26, UL2464 metal braided shield twisted-pair
cable.
6.
As for motor cable selection, please use the 600V PTFE wire and the wire length
should be less than 98.4ft. (30m). If the wiring distance is longer than 30m
(98.4ft.), please choose the adequate wire size according to the voltage.
7.
The shield of shielded twisted-pair cables should be connected to the SHIELD end
(terminal marked
8.
) of the servo drive.
For the connectors and cables specifications, please refer to section 3.1.6 for
details.
3-4
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.1.3 Wiring Methods
For servo drives from 100W to 1.5kW the input power can be either single or three-phase.
However, single -phase connections are for servo drives 1.5kW and below only.
In the wiring diagram figures 3.2& 3.3:
Power ON : contact “a” (normally open)
Power OFF : contact “b” (normally closed)
MC : coil of electromagnetic contactor, self-holding power, contact of main circuit power
Figure 3.2 Single-Phase Power Supply (1.5kW and below)
Revision June 2010
3-5
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Figure 3.3 Three-Phase Power Supply (all models)
3-6
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.1.4 Motor Power Cable Connector Specifications
The boxes () in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section
1.2 for model explanation.)
Motor Model Name
ECMA-C20401S (100W)
ECMA-C20602S (200W)
ECMA-C20604S (400W)
ECMA-CM0604PS (400W)
ECMA-C208047 (400W)
ECMA-C20807S (750W)
ECMA-C20907S (750W)
U, V, W / Electromagnetic Brake Connector
Terminal
Identification
A
HOUSING: JOWLE (C4201H00-2*2PA)
ECMA-C20602S (200W)
ECMA-C20604S (400W)
ECMA-CM0604PS (400W)
ECMA-C208047 (400W)
ECMA-C20807S (750W)
ECMA-C20907S (750W)
B
HOUSING: JOWLE (C4201H00-2*3PA)
ECMA-G21303S (300W)
ECMA-E21305S (500W)
ECMA-G21306S (600W)
ECMA-GM1306PS (600W)
ECMA-G21309S (900W)
ECMA-GM1309PS (900W)
ECMA-C21010S (1000W)
ECMA-C20910S (1000W)
ECMA-E21310S (1000W)
ECMA-E21315S (1500W)
ECMA-C21020S (2000W)
ECMA-E21320S (2000W)
C
3106A-20-18S
ECMA-E31820S (2000W)
ECMA-E31830S (3000W)
ECMA-F21830S (3000W)
D
3106A-24-11S
Revision June 2010
3-7
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Terminal
Identification
U
(Red)
V
(White)
W
(Black)
CASE GROUND
(Green)
BRAKE1
(Blue)
BRAKE2
(Brown)
A
1
2
3
4
-
-
B
1
2
4
5
3
6
C
F
I
B
E
G
H
D
D
E
F
G
A
B
NOTE
1) The coil of brake has no polarity. The names of terminal identification are BRAKE1 (Blue)
and BRAKE2 (Brown).
2) The power supply for brake is DC24V. Never use it for VDD, the +24V source voltage.
3-8
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.1.5 Encoder Connector Specifications
The boxes () in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section
1.2 for model explanation.)
Motor Model Name
ECMA-C20401S (100W)
ECMA-C20602S (200W)
ECMA-C20604S (400W)
ECMA-CM0604PS (400W)
ECMA-C208047 (400W)
ECMA-C20807S (750W)
ECMA-C20907S (750W)
A
HOUSING: AMP (1-172161-9)
ECMA-G21303S (300W)
ECMA-E21305S (500W)
ECMA-G21306S (600W)
ECMA-GM1306PS (600W)
ECMA-G21309S (900W)
ECMA-GM1309PS (900W)
ECMA-C21010S (1000W)
ECMA-C20910S (1000W)
ECMA-E21310S (1000W)
ECMA-E21315S (1500W)
ECMA-C21020S (2000W)
ECMA-E21320S (2000W)
ECMA-E21820S (2000W)
ECMA-E21830S (3000W)
ECMA-F21830S (3000W)
B
3106A-20-29S
Terminal
Identificati
on
T+
T-
Reserve
d
Reserve
d
Reserve
d
Reserve
d
A
1
(Blue)
4
(Blue
/Black)
-
-
-
-
B
A
B
C
D
F
G
Revision June 2010
Terminal
Identification
Encoder Connector
+5V
GND
8
7
(Black &
(Red &
Red/White) Black/White)
S
R
BRAID
SHELD
9
L
3-9
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.1.6 Cable Specifications for Servo Drive
The boxes () in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section
1.2 for model explanation.)
Power Cable
Servo Drive and Servo Motor
ASD-B2-0121- ECMA-C20401S
ASD-B2-0221- ECMA-C20602S
ECMA-C20604S
ECMA-CM0604PS
ASD-B2-0421- ECMA-C208047
ECMA-E21305S
ECMA-G21303S
ECMA-C20807S
ECMA-C20907S
ASD-B2-0721-
ECMA-G21306S
ECMA-GM1306PS
ECMA-C21010S
ECMA-C20910S
ASD-B2-1021- ECMA-E21310S
ECMA-G21309S
ECMA-GM1309PS
ASD-B2-1521- ECMA-E21315S
ECMA-C21020S
ASD-B2-2023- ECMA-E21320S
ECMA-E21820S
ECMA-E21830S
ASD-B2-3023-
ECMA-F21830S
3-10
Power Cable - Wire Gauge AWG (mm2)
L1c, L2c
R, S, T
U, V, W
P ,C
2.1
0.82
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG18)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
0.82
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG18)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
0.82
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG18)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
0.82
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG18)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
0.82
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG18)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
0.82
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG18)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
1.3
2.1
0.82
2.1
(AWG16)
(AWG14)
(AWG18)
(AWG14)
2.1
0.82
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG18)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
0.82
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG18)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
0.82
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG18)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
0.82
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG18)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
1.3
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
1.3
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
1.3
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
1.3
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
1.3
2.1
1.3
2.1
(AWG16)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
(AWG14)
2.1
1.3
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
2.1
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG14)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
2.1
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG14)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
3.3
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG12)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
3.3
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG12)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
2.1
3.3
2.1
1.3
(AWG14)
(AWG12)
(AWG14)
(AWG16)
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable - Wire Gauge AWG (mm2)
Servo Drive
Wire Size
Core Number
UL Rating
Standard Wire
Length
ASD-B2-0121-
0.13 (AWG26)
10 core (4 pair)
UL2464
3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-0221-
0.13 (AWG26)
10 core (4 pair)
UL2464
3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-0421-
0.13 (AWG26)
10 core (4 pair)
UL2464
3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-0721-
0.13 (AWG26)
10 core (4 pair)
UL2464
3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-1021-
0.13 (AWG26)
10 core (4 pair)
UL2464
3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-1521-
0.13 (AWG26)
10 core (4 pair)
UL2464
3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-2023-
0.13 (AWG26)
10 core (4 pair)
UL2464
3m (9.84ft.)
ASD-B2-3023-
0.13 (AWG26)
10 core (4 pair)
UL2464
3m (9.84ft.)
NOTE
1)
Please use shielded twisted-pair cables for wiring to prevent voltage coupling and
eliminate electrical noise and interference.
2)
The shield of shielded twisted-pair cables should be connected to the SHIELD end
(terminal marked
3)
) of the servo drive.
In order to prevent fire hazard and accidents, please form the wiring by following the
cable specifications outlined above.
4)
The boxes () at the ends of the servo drive model names represent the model type of
ASDA-B2 series. For the actual model name, please refer to the ordering information of
the actual purchased product.
5)
The boxes () in the servo motor model names are for optional configurations (keyway,
brake and oil sea).
Revision June 2010
3-11
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.2 Basic Wiring
Figure 3.4 Basic Wiring Schematic of 400W and below models (without built-in
regenerative resistor and cooling fan)
3-12
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Figure 3.5 Basic Wiring Schematic of 750W model (with built-in regenerative resistor
but without cooling fan)
Revision June 2010
3-13
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Figure 3.6 Basic Wiring Schematic of 1kW~1.5kW models (with built-in regenerative
resistor and cooling fan)
3-14
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Figure 3.7 Basic Wiring Schematic of 2kW~3kW models (with built-in regenerative
resistor and cooling fan)
Revision June 2010
3-15
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.3 Input / Output Interface Connector - CN1
The CN1 Interface Connector provides access to three signal groups:
i
General interface for the analog speed and torque control, encoder reference signal from
the motor, pulse / direction inputs, and reference voltages.
ii
8 programmable Digital Inputs (DI), can be set via parameters P2-10 ~ P2-17
iii 5 programmable Digital Outputs (DO), can be set via parameters P2-18 ~ P2-22
A detailed explanation of each group is available in Section 3.3.2, Tables 3.A, 3.B & 3.C.
3.3.1 CN1 Terminal Identification
Figure 3.8 The Layout of CN1 Drive Connector
3-16
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
CN1 Terminal Signal Identification
16
1
DO4+
DO3-
DO3+
DO2DO2+
DO1-
DO1+
DI4-
DI1-
11
12
DI2-
Digital input
COM+
Power
input (12~24V)
DI9-
26
27
14
15
OZ
COM-
DO6-
Revision June 2010
/OB
Encoder /B
pulse output
/OZ
Encoder /Z
pulse output
OB
DO4DO5-
Encoder Z
pulse
Line-driver
output
VDD(24V)
power
ground
29
31
DI7-
Digital input
32
DI6-
Digital input
33
DI5-
Digital input
34
DI3-
Digital input
35
PULL HI
Pulse applied
power
36
High-speed
/HPULSE position pulse
(-)
37
/SIGN
38
High-speed
HPULSE position pulse
(+)
39
SIGN
Position sign
(+)
40
/HSIGN
High-speed
position sign (-)
41
/PULSE
Pulse input (-)
42
HSIGN
High-speed
position sign
(+)
43
PULSE
Pulse input (+)
OCZ
Encoder Z
pulse
Line-driver
output
Encoder B pulse
output
Digital output
Digital output
Digital input
28
13
Encoder
/A pulse output
Digital input
25
10
/OA
Encoder
A pulse output
Digital input
24
9
OA
Digital output
23
8
V_REF
Analog speed
input (+)
Digital output
22
7
GND
Analog input
signal ground
Digital output
21
6
Analog torque
Input
Digital output
20
5
T_REF
Digital output
19
4
VDD
+24V power
output (for
external I/O)
Digital output
18
3
Digital output
Digital output
17
2
DO6+
DO5+
Digital output
GND
Analog input
signal ground
44
30
DI8-
Digital input
Position sign (-)
Digital output
3-17
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.3.2 Signals Explanation of Connector CN1
Table 3.A General Signals
Pin No
Details
Wiring Diagram
(Refer to 3-3-3)
V_REF
20
1. Motor speed command: -10V to +10V,
corresponds to -3000 ~ +3000 r/min
speed command (Factory default setting).
2. Motor speed command: -10V to +10V,
corresponds to -3 ~ +3 rotations position
command (Factory default setting).
C1
T_REF
18
Motor torque command: -10V to +10V,
corresponds to -100% to +100% rated torque
command.
C1
PULSE
/PULSE
Position SIGN
Pulse
/SIGN
Input
41
43
37
39
The drive can accept two different types of
pulse inputs: Open Collector and Line Driver.
Three different pulse commands can be
selected via parameter P1-00. Quadrature ,
CW + CCW pulse & Pulse / Direction.
C3/C4
PULL HI
35
Should an Open Collector type of pulse be
used this terminal must be lulled high to pin
17.
C3
38
36
42
40
The drive can accept two different types of
high-speed pulse inputs: +5V input and Linedriver input. The max. input frequency is
4MHz.
Three different pulse commands can be
selected via parameter P1-00. They are A
phase + B phase (Quadrature), CW pulse +
CCW pulse, and Pulse + Direction.
C4-2
Signal
Analog
Signal
Input
High- HPULSE
speed /HPULSE
Position
Pulse HSIGN
Input /HSIGN
Position
Pulse
Output
OA
/OA
21
22
OB
/OB
25
23
OZ
/OZ
13
24
OCZ
VDD
Encoder signal output A, B, Z (Line-driver
output). The motor encoder signals are
available through these terminals.
C13/C14
44
Encoder signal output Z (Open-collector
output).
-
17
VDD is the +24V source voltage provided by
the drive. Maximum permissible current
500mA.
11
14
COM+ is the common voltage rail of the
Digital Input and Digital Output signals.
Connect VDD to COM+ for source mode. For
external applied power sink mode (+12V to
+24V), the positive terminal should be
connected to COM+ and the negative to
COM-.
Power
COM+
COM-
3-18
-
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Signal
Power
GND
Pin No
Details
Wiring Diagram
(Refer to 3-3-3)
19
The polarity of VCC is with respect to Ground
(GND).
-
Signals Explanation of Connector CN5
Signal
Analog
MON1
Monitor
MON2
Output
Pin No
Details
Wiring Diagram
(Refer to 3-3-3)
1
3
Monitor operation status: Motor
characteristics such as speed and current can
be represented by analog voltages. The drive
provides two channels (MON1 and MON2)
which can be configured with the parameter
P0-03 to output the desired characteristics.
Please refer to the parameter P0-03 for
monitoring commands and P1-04 / P1-05 for
scaling factors.
Output voltage is reference to the power
ground.
C2
The Digital Input (DI) and Digital Output (DO) have factory default settings which
correspond to the various servo drive control modes. (See section 1.5). However, both the
DI's and DO's can be programmed independently to meet the requirements of the users.
Detailed in Tables 3.B and 3.C are the DO and DI functions with their corresponding
signal name and wiring schematic. The factory default settings of the DI and DO signals
are detailed in Table 3.F and 3.G.
All of the DI's and DO's and their corresponding pin numbers are factory set and nonchangeable, however, all of the assigned signals and control modes are user changeable.
For Example, the factory default setting of DO5 (pins 28/27) can be assigned to DO1
(pins 7/6) and vise versa.
The following Tables 3.B and 3.C detail the functions, applicable operational modes,
signal name and relevant wiring schematic of the default DI and DO signals.
Revision June 2010
3-19
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Table 3.B DO Signals
Pin No.
DO
Assigned
(Default)
Signal Control Mode
+
-
Details
SRDY
ALL
7
SRDY is activated when the servo drive
is ready to run. All fault and alarm
6
conditions, if present, have been
cleared.
SON
Not assigned
-
-
5
ZSPD is activated when the drive
senses the motor is equal to or below
4
the Zero Speed Range setting as
defined in parameter P1-38.
ZSPD
ALL
TSPD
ALL
(except PT)
-
TPOS
PT, PT-S, PT-T
1
TQL
Not assigned
-
Servo ready (SRDY) is "ON" where the
servo is ready to run, NO fault / alarm
exists.
TSPD is activated once the drive has
detected the motor has reached the
Target Rotation Speed setting as
defined in parameter P1-39.
1. When the drive is in PT mode, TPOS
will be activated when the position
26
error is equal and below the setting
value of P1-54.
TQL is activated when the drive has
- detected that the motor has reached
the torques limits.
ALRM is activated when the drive has
detected a fault condition. (However,
when Reverse limit error, Forward limit
27 error, Emergency stop, Serial
communication error, and
Undervoltage these fault occur, WARN
is activated first.)
ALRM
ALL
28
BRKR
ALL
-
-
BRKR is the control terminal of motor
brake.
OLW
ALL
-
-
OLW is activated when the servo drive
has detected that the motor has
reached the output overload level .
WARN
ALL
-
-
Servo warning output. WARN is
activated when the drive has detected
Reverse limit error, Forward limit error,
Emergency stop, Serial communication
error, and Undervoltage these fault
conditions.
S_CMP
S, Sz
-
-
SP_CMP will be activated when the
speed error is equal and below the
setting value of P1-47.
SDO_0
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit00 of P4-06.
SDO_1
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit01 of P4-06.
SDO_2
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit02 of P4-06.
3-20
Wiring Diagram
(Refer to 3-3-3)
C5/C6/C7/C8
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Pin No.
DO
Assigned
(Default)
Signal Control Mode
+
-
Details
SDO_3
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit03 of P4-06.
SDO_4
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit04 of P4-06.
SDO_5
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit05 of P4-06.
SDO_6
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit06 of P4-06.
SDO_7
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit07 of P4-06.
SDO_8
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit08 of P4-06.
SDO_9
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit09 of P4-06.
SDO_A
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit10 of P4-06.
SDO_B
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit11 of P4-06.
SDO_C
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit12 of P4-06.
SDO_D
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit13 of P4-06.
SDO_E
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit14 of P4-06.
SDO_F
ALL
-
-
Output the status of bit15 of P4-06.
Wiring Diagram
(Refer to 3-3-3)
C5/C6/C7/C8
NOTE
1) PINS 3 & 2 can TSPD when control mode S is selected.
2) The DO signals that do not have pin numbers in Tables 3.B are not default DO signals. If
the users want to use these non-default DO signals, the users need to change the settings
of parameters P2-18 ~ P2-22. The “state” of the output function may be turned ON or OFF
as it will be dependant on the settings of parameters P2-18 ~ P2-22. Please refer to section
3.3.3 for details.
Table 3.C DI Signals
DI
Signal
Assigned Pin No.
Control
Mode (Default)
SON
ALL
9
ARST
ALL
33
GAINUP
ALL
-
CCLR
ZCLAMP
Revision June 2010
PT
ALL
Details
Wiring Diagram
(Refer to 3-3-3)
Servo On. Switch servo to "Servo Ready".
A number of Faults (Alarms) can be
cleared by activating ARST.
Gain switching
10
When CCLR is activated the setting is
parameter P2-50 Pulse Clear Mode is
executed.
-
When this signal is On and the motor
speed value is lower than the setting
value of P1-38, it is used to lock the
motor in the instant position while
ZCLAMP is On.
C9/C10
C11/C12
3-21
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
DI
Signal
Assigned Pin No.
Control
Mode (Default)
Details
When this signal is On, the motor is in
reverse rotation.
CMDINV
T, S
-
TRQLM
S, Sz
10
ON indicates the torque limit command is
valid.
SPDLM
T, Tz
10
ON indicates the speed limit command is
valid.
STOP
-
-
SPD0
S, Sz,
PT-S, S-T
34
SPD1
8
Motor stop.
Select the source of speed command:
See table 3.D.
TCM0
PT, T, Tz,
PT-T
34
TCM1
S-T
8
S-P
PT-S
31
Speed / Position mode switching
OFF: Speed, ON: Position
S-T
S-T
31
Speed / Torque mode switching
OFF: Speed, ON: Torque
T-P
PT-T
31
Torque / Position mode switching
OFF: Torque, ON: Position
EMGS
ALL
30
It should be contact “b” and normally ON
or a fault (ALRM) will display.
NL(CWL)
PT, S, T
Sz, Tz
32
Reverse inhibit limit. It should be contact
“b” and normally ON or a fault (ALRM) will
display.
PL(CCWL)
PT, S, T
Sz, Tz
31
Forward inhibit limit. It should be contact
“b” and normally ON or a fault (ALRM) will
display.
TLLM
Not
assigned
-
Reverse operation torque limit (Torque
limit function is valid only when P1-02 is
enabled)
TRLM
Not
assigned
-
Forward operation torque limit (Torque
limit function is valid only when P1-02 is
enabled)
JOGU
ALL
-
Forward JOG input. When JOGU is
activated, the motor will JOG in forward
direction.
JOGD
ALL
-
Reverse JOG input. When JOGD is
activated, the motor will JOG in reverse
direction.
GNUM0
PT, PT-S
-
Electronic gear ratio (Numerator)
selection 0 [See P2-60~P2-62]
GNUM1
PT, PT-S
-
Electronic gear ratio (Numerator)
selection 1 [See P2-60~P2-62]
3-22
Wiring Diagram
(Refer to 3-3-3)
Select the source of torque command:
See table 3.E.
C9/C10
C11/C12
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
DI
Signal
INHP
Assigned Pin No.
Control
Mode (Default)
PT, PT-S
-
Details
Pulses inhibit input. When the drive is in
position mode, if INHP is activated, the
external pulse input command is not
valid.
Wiring Diagram
(Refer to 3-3-3)
C9/C10
C11/C12
NOTE
1) The DI signals that do not have pin numbers in Tables 3.C are not default DI signals. If the
users want to use these non-default DI signals, the users need to change the settings of
parameters P2-10 ~ P2-17. The “state” of the output function may be turned ON or OFF as it
will be dependant on the settings of parameters P2-10 ~ P2-17. Please refer to section
3.3.3 for details.
Table 3.D Source of Speed Command
SPD1
SPD0
Parameter
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
P1-09
ON
OFF
P1-10
ON
ON
P1-11
S mode: analog input
Sz mode: 0
Table 3.E Source of Torque Command
TCM1
TCM0
Parameter
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
P1-12
ON
OFF
P1-13
ON
ON
P1-14
T mode: analog input
Tz mode: 0
The default DI and DO signals in different control mode are listed in the following table
3.F and table 3.G. Although the content of the table 3.F and table 3.G do not provide
more information than the table 3.B and table 3.C above, as each control mode is
separated and listed in different row, it is easy for user to view and can avoid confusion.
However, the Pin number of each signal can not be displayed in the table 3.F and table
3.G.
Revision June 2010
3-23
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Table 3.F Default DI signals and Control modes
Signal
DI
Code
SON
01
ARST
PT
S
T
Sz
Tz
PT-S PT-T
S-T
Servo On
DI1
DI1
DI1
DI1
DI1
DI1
DI1
DI1
02
Reset
DI5
DI5
DI5
DI5
DI5
GAINUP
03
Gain switching in
speed and position
mode
CCLR
04
Pulse clear
DI2
DI2
ZCLAMP
05
Low speed CLAMP
CMDINV
06
Command input
reverse control
Reserved
07
Reserved
Reserved
08
Reserved
TRQLM
09
Torque limit enabled
SPDLM
10
Speed limit enabled
STOP
46
Motor stop
SPD0
14
Speed command
selection 0
DI3
DI3
DI3
DI3
SPD1
15
Speed command
selection 1
DI4
DI4
DI4
DI4
TCM0
16
Torque command
selection 0
DI3
DI3
DI3
DI3
DI5
TCM1
17
Torque command
selection 1
DI4
DI4
DI4
DI4
DI6
S-P
18
Position / Speed
mode switching (OFF:
Speed, ON: Position)
S-T
19
Speed / Torque mode
switching (OFF:
Speed, ON: Torque)
T-P
20
Torque / Position
mode switching (OFF:
Torque, ON: Position)
Reserved
2C
Reserved
Reserved
2D
Reserved
EMGS
21
Emergency stop
DI8
DI8
DI8
DI8
DI8
NL(CWL)
22
Reverse inhibit limit
DI6
DI6
DI6
DI6
DI6
PL(CCWL)
23
Forward inhibit limit
DI7
DI7
DI7
DI7
DI7
Reserved
24
Reserved
TLLM
25
Reverse operation
torque limit
3-24
Function
DI2
DI2
DI2
DI2
DI2
DI7
DI7
DI7
DI8
DI8
DI8
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Signal
DI
Code
TRLM
26
Forward operation
torque limit
Reserved
27
Reserved
Reserved
36
Reserved
JOGU
37
Forward JOG input
JOGD
38
Reverse JOG input
GNUM0
43
Electronic gear ratio
(Numerator) selection
0
GNUM1
44
Electronic gear ratio
(Numerator) selection
1
INHP
45
Pulse inhibit input
Function
PT
S
T
Sz
Tz
PT-S PT-T
S-T
Tz
PT-S PT-T
S-T
NOTE
1) For Pin numbers of DI1~DI8 signals, please refer to section 3.3.1.
Table 3.G Default DO signals and Control modes
Signal
DO
Code
Function
SRDY
01 Servo ready
SON
02 Servo On
ZSPD
03 Zero speed
TSPD
04 Speed reached
TPOS
05
Positioning
completed
TQL
06
Reached torques
limits
ALRM
07
Servo alarm output
(Servo fault)
BRKR
08
Electromagnetic
brake
OLW
10
Output overload
warning
WARN
11
Servo warning
output
SNL(SCWL)
13
Reverse software
limit
SPL(SCCWL)
14
Forward software
limit
Revision June 2010
PT
S
T
Sz
DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1
DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2
DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3
DO4
DO4 DO4
DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5
DO4 DO4 DO4 DO4
3-25
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Signal
DO
Code
SP_OK
19
Speed reached
output
SDO_0
30
Output the status of
bit00 of P4-06.
SDO_1
31
Output the status of
bit01 of P4-06.
SDO_2
32
Output the status of
bit02 of P4-06.
SDO_3
33
Output the status of
bit03 of P4-06.
SDO_4
34
Output the status of
bit04 of P4-06.
SDO_5
35
Output the status of
bit05 of P4-06.
SDO_6
36
Output the status of
bit06 of P4-06.
SDO_7
37
Output the status of
bit07 of P4-06.
SDO_8
38
Output the status of
bit08 of P4-06.
SDO_9
39
Output the status of
bit09 of P4-06.
SDO_A
3A
Output the status of
bit10 of P4-06.
SDO_B
3B
Output the status of
bit11 of P4-06.
SDO_C
3C
Output the status of
bit12 of P4-06.
SDO_D
3D
Output the status of
bit13 of P4-06.
SDO_E
3E
Output the status of
bit14 of P4-06.
SDO_F
3F
Output the status of
bit15 of P4-06.
Function
PT
S
T
Sz
Tz
PT-S PT-T
S-T
NOTE
1) For Pin numbers of DO1~DO6 signals, please refer to section 3.3.1.
3-26
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.3.3 Wiring Diagrams of I/O Signals (CN1)
The valid voltage range of analog input command in speed and torque mode is -10V
~+10V. The command value can be set via relevant parameters.
C1: Speed / Torque analog signal input
C2: Analog monitor output (MON1, MON2)
There are two kinds of pulse inputs, Line driver input and Open-collector input. Max.
input pulse frequency of Line driver input is 500kpps and max. input pulse frequency of
Open-collector input is 200kpps.
C3-1: Pulse input, for the use of internal
power supply (Open-collector input)
C3-2: Pulse input, for the use of external
power supply (Open-collector input)
 Caution: Do not use dual power supply. Failure to observe this caution may result in
damage to the servo drive and servo motor.
Revision June 2010
3-27
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
C4-1: Pulse input (Line driver) It requires 5V power supply only. Never apply a 24V power
supply.
C4-2: High-speed pulse input (Line driver). It requires 5V power supply only. Never apply
a 24V power supply.
 Caution: Ensure that the ground terminal of the controller and the servo drive should be
connected to each other.
3-28
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Be sure to connect a diode when the drive is applied to inductive load.
(Permissible current: 40mA, Instantaneous peak current: max. 100mA)
C5: Wiring of DO signal, for the use of
internal power supply, general load
C6: Wiring of DO signal, for the use of
internal power supply, inductive load
C7: Wiring of DO signal, for the use of
external power supply, general load
C8: Wiring of DO signal, for the use of
external power supply, inductive load
Revision June 2010
3-29
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
Use a relay or open-collector transistor to input signal.
NPN transistor with multiple emitter fingers (SINK Mode)
C9: Wiring of DI signal, for the use of
internal power supply
C10: Wiring of DI signal, for the use of external
power supply
PNP transistor with multiple emitter fingers (SOURCE Mode)
C11: Wiring of DI signal, for the use of
internal power supply
C12: Wiring of DI signal, for the use of external
power supply
 Caution: Do not use dual power supply. Failure to observe this caution may result in
damage to the servo drive and servo motor.
3-30
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
C13: Encoder output signal (Line driver)
C14: Encoder output signal (Photocoupler)
C15: Encoder OCZ output (Open-collector Z-pulse output)
Revision June 2010
3-31
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.3.4 User-defined DI and DO signals
If the default DI and DO signals could not be able to fulfill users’ requirements, there are
still user-defined DI and DO signals. The setting method is easy and they are all defined
via parameters. The user-defined DI and DO signals are defined via parameters P2-10 to
P2-17 P2-36 and P2-18 to P2-22 and P-37. Please refer to the following Table 3.H for the
settings.
Table 3.H User-defined DI and DO signals
Signal Name
DI
3-32
Pin No.
Parameter
Signal Name
Pin No.
DI1-
CN1-9
P2-10
DO1+
CN1-7
DI2-
CN1-10
P2-11
DO1-
CN1-6
DI3-
CN1-34
P2-12
DO2+
CN1-5
DI4-
CN1-8
P2-13
DO2-
CN1-4
DI5-
CN1-33
P2-14
DO3+
CN1-3
DI6-
CN1-32
P2-15
DO3-
CN1-2
DI7-
CN1-31
P2-16
DO4+
CN1-1
DI8-
CN1-30
P2-17
DO4-
CN1-26
DI9
CN1-12
P2-36
DO5+
CN1-28
DO5-
CN1-27
DO6+
CN1-16
DO6-
CN1-15
DO
Parameter
P2-18
P2-19
P2-20
P2-21
P2-22
P2-37
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.4 Encoder Connector CN2
Figure 3.9 The layout of CN2 Drive Connector
Figure 3.10 The layout of CN2 Motor Connector
Quick Connector
Military Connector
HOUSING: AMP (1-172161-9)
3106A-20-29S
CN2 Terminal Signal Identification
Drive Connector
Motor Connector
PIN No.
Terminal
Identification
Description
Military
Connector
Quick
Connector
Color
4
T+
Serial communication
signal input / output (+)
A
1
Blue
5
T-
Serial communication
signal input / output (-)
B
4
Blue/Black
-
-
Reserved
-
-
-
-
-
Reserved
-
-
-
14,16
+5V
+5V power supply
S
7
Red &
Red/White
13,15
GND
Ground
R
8
Black &
Black/White
-
-
Shielding
L
9
-
Revision June 2010
3-33
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.5 Serial Communication Connector CN3
3.5.1 CN3 Terminal Layout and Identification
The servo drive can be connected to a PC or controller via a serial communication
connector. Users can operate the servo drive through PC software supplied by Delta
(contact to the dealer). The communication connector/port of Delta servo drive can
provide three common serial communication interfaces: RS-232, RS-485, and RS-422
connection. RS-232 is mostly be used but is somewhat limited. The maximum cable
length for an RS-232 connection is 15 meters (50 feet). Using RS-485 or RS-422 interface
can allow longer distance for transmission and support multiple drives to be connected
simultaneously.
CN3 Drive Connector
CN3 Terminal Signal Identification
PIN No.
Signal Name
1
Grounding
2
RS-232 data
transmission
Terminal
Identification
GND
RS-232-TX
Description
Ground
For data transmission of the servo drive.
Connected to the RS-232 interface of PC.
3
-
-
Reserved
4
RS-232 data receiving
RS-232_RX
For data receiving of the servo drive.
Connected to the RS-232 interface of PC.
5
RS-485 data
transmission
RS-485(+)
For data transmission of the servo drive
(differential line driver + end)
6
RS-485 data
transmission
RS-485(-)
For data transmission of the servo drive
(differential line driver - end)
NOTE
1)
2)
3-34
For the connection of RS-485, please refer to page 8.3.
There are two kinds of IEEE1394 communication cables available on the market. If the user
uses one kind of cable, which its GND terminal (Pin 1) and its shielding is short-circuited,
the communication may be damaged. Never connect the case of the terminal to the ground
of this kind of communication cable.
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.5.2 Connection between PC and Connector CN3
Revision June 2010
3-35
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.6 Standard Connection Example
Please note:
*1 Please refer to C3 ~ C4 wiring diagrams in
section 3.3.3 (on page 3-24 and 3-25).
*2 Please refer to C3 ~ C4 wiring diagrams in
section 3.3.3 (on page 3-24 and 3-25).
*3 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring diagrams
(SINK / SOURCE mode) in section 3.3.3
(on page 3-27).
*4 400W and below drives do not provide
built-in regenerative resistor.
*5 The coil of brake has no polarity.
3-36
Revision June 2010
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.6.2 Speed Control Mode
Please note:
*1 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring diagrams
(SINK / SOURCE mode) in section 3.3.3
(on page 3-27).
*2 400W and below drives do not provide
built-in regenerative resistor.
*3 The coil of brake has no polarity.
Revision June 2010
3-37
Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring
3.6.3 Torque Control Mode
Please note:
*1 Please refer to C9 ~ C12 wiring
diagrams (SINK / SOURCE mode) in
section 3.3.3 (on page 3-27).
*2 400W and below drives do not provide
built-in regenerative resistor.
*3 The coil of brake has no polarity.
3-38
Revision June 2010
Chapter 4 Display and Operation
This chapter describes the basic operation of the digital keypad and the features it offers.
4.1 Description of the Digital Keypad
The digital keypad includes the display panel and function keys. The Figure 4.1 shows all of
the features of the digital keypad and an overview of their functions.
Figure 4.1
Name
Function
LCD Display
The LCD Display (5-digit, 7-step display panel) shows the monitor codes,
parameter settings and operation values of the AC servo drive.
Charge LED
The Charge LED lights to indicate the power is applied to the circuit.
MODE Key
MODE Key. Pressing MODE key can enter or exit different parameter
groups, and switch between Monitor mode and Parameter mode.
SHIFT Key
SHIFT Key. Pressing SHIFT key can scrolls through parameter groups. After
a parameter is selected and its value displayed, pressing SHIFT key can
move the cursor to the left and then change parameter settings (blinking
digits) by using arrow keys.
UP and DOWN
Key
UP and DOWN arrow Key. Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow key can scroll
through and change monitor codes, parameter groups and various
parameter settings.
SET Key
SET Key. Pressing the SET key can display and save the parameter groups,
the various parameter settings. In monitor mode, pressing SET key can
switch decimal or hexadecimal display. In parameter mode, pressing SET
key can enter into parameter setting mode. During diagnosis operation,
pressing SET key can execute the function in the last step. (The parameter
settings changes are not effective until the SET key is pressed.)
Revision June 2010
4-1
Chapter 4 Display and Operation
4.2 Display Flowchart
Figure 4.2
1.
Keypad Operation
When the power is applied to the AC servo drive, the LCD display will show the monitor
function codes for approximately one second, then enter into the monitor mode.
2.
In monitor mode, pressing MODE key can enter into parameter mode. In parameter
mode, pressing MODE key can return to monitor mode.
3.
No matter working in which mode, when an alarm occurs, the system will enter into
fault mode immediately. In fault mode, pressing MODE key can switch to other modes.
In other modes, if no key is pressed for over 20 seconds, the system will return to fault
mode automatically.
4.
In monitor mode, pressing UP or DOWN arrow key can switch monitor parameter code.
At this time, monitor display symbol will display for approximately one second.
5.
In monitor mode, pressing MODE key can enter into parameter mode, pressing the
SHIFT key can switch parameter group and pressing UP or DOWN arrow key can change
parameter group code.
6.
In parameter mode, the system will enter into the setting mode immediately after the
Set key is pressed. The LCD display will display the corresponding setting value of this
parameter simultaneously. Then, users can use UP or DOWN arrow key to change
parameter value or press MODE key to exit and return back to the parameter mode.
7.
In parameter setting mode, the users can move the cursor to left by pressing the SHIFT
key and change the parameter settings (blinking digits) by pressing the UP or DOWN
arrow key.
8.
After the setting value change is completed, press SET key to save parameter settings
or execute command.
9.
When the parameter setting is completed, LCD display will show the end code
“SAVED“ and automatically return back to parameter mode.
4-2
Revision June 2010
Chapter 4 Display and Operation
4.3 Status Display
4.3.1 Save Setting Display
After the SET key is pressed, LCD display will show the following display messages for
approx. one second according to different status.
Display Message
Description
The setting value is saved correctly. [Saved)
This parameter is read only. Write-protected. (Read-Only)
Invalid password or no password was input. (Locked)
The setting value is error or invalid. (Out of Range)
The servo system is running and it is unable to accept
this setting value to be changed. (Servo On)
This parameter is valid after restarting the drive. (Power
On)
4.3.2 Decimal Point Display
Display Message
Description
High/Low byte display. When the data is a decimal 32-bit
data, these two digits are used to show if the display is
high byte or low byte.
Negative value display. When the data is displayed in
decimal format, the most left two digits represent negative
sign no matter it is a 16-bit or 32-bit data. If the data is
displayed in hexadecimal format, it is a positive value
always and no negative sign is displayed.
4.3.3 Fault Message Display
Display Message
Description
When the AC servo drive has a fault, LCD display will
display “ALnnn”. “AL” indicates the alarm and “nnn”
indicates the drive fault code. For the list of drive fault
code, please refer to parameter P0-01 or refer to Chapter
11 (Troubleshooting).
4.3.4 Polarity Setting Display
Display Message
Description
Positive value display. When entering into parameter
setting mode, pressing UP or DOWN arrow key can
increase or decrease the display value. SHIFT key is used
to change the selected digit (The selected digit will
blink).
Revision June 2010
4-3
Chapter 4 Display and Operation
Display Message
Description
Negative value display. Continuously press SHIFT key for
two seconds and then the positive(+) or negative(-) sign
can be switched. When the setting value exceeds its
setting range, the positive(+) and negative(-) sign can not
be switched. (The negative value display is for a decimal
negative value only. There is no negative value display
for a hexadecimal negative value.)
4.3.5 Monitor Setting Display
When the AC servo drive is applied to power, the LCD display will show the monitor
function codes for approximately one second and then enter into the monitor mode. In
monitor mode, in order to change the monitor status, the users can press UP or DOWN
arrow key or change parameter P0-02 directly to specify the monitor status. When the
power is applied, the LCD display will show ASDB2 first and then display the monitor
status depending on the setting value of P0-02. For example, if the setting value of P0-02
is 4 when the power is applied, the monitor function will be input pulse number of pulse
command. After ASDB2 shows on the LCD display, the C-PLS monitor codes will display
next and then the pulse number will display after.
P0-02
Setting
4-4
Display Message
Description
Unit
0
Motor feedback pulse number (after
electronic gear ratio is set)
[user unit]
1
Input pulse number of pulse
command (after electronic gear
ratio is set)
[user unit]
2
Position error counts between
control command pulse and
feedback pulse
[user unit]
3
Motor feedback pulse number
(encoder unit, 1600000 pulse/rev)
[pulse]
4
Input pulse number of pulse
command (before electronic gear
ratio is set) (encoder unit)
[pulse]
5
Position error counts (after
electronic gear ratio is set) (encoder
unit)
[pulse]
6
Input frequency of pulse command
[Kpps]
7
Motor rotation speed
[r/min]
8
Speed input command
[Volt]
9
Speed input command
[r/min]
Revision June 2010
Chapter 4 Display and Operation
P0-02
Setting
Display Message
Description
Unit
10
Torque input command
[Volt]
11
Torque input command
[%]
12
Average load
[%]
13
Peak load
[%]
14
Main circuit voltage
15
Ratio of load inertia to Motor inertia
(Please note that if the display is
130, it indicates that the actual
inertia is 13.0)
16
IGBT temperature
[oC]
17
Resonance frequency (The low byte
is the first resonance point and the
high byte is the second resonance
point.)
[Hz]
18
Absolute pulse number relative to
encoder (use Z phase as home). The
value of Z phase home point is 0,
and it can be the value from -5000
to +5000 pulses.
-
[Volt]
[0.1times]
The following table lists the display examples of monitor value:
Display Message
(Dec.)
Description
16-bit
Data
(Hex.)
(Dec. High Byte)
(Dec. Low Byte)
(Hex. High Byte)
(Hex. Low Byte)
32-bit
Data
Decimal display. When the actual value is
1234, the display is 01234.
Hexadecimal display. When the actual value is
0x1234, the display is 1234.
Decimal display. When the actual value is
1234567890, the display of high byte is
1234.5 and the display of low byte is 67890.
Hexadecimal display. When the actual value is
0x12345678, the display of high byte is h1234
and the display of low byte is L5678.
Negative value display. When the actual value is 12345, the display is 1.2.345. (The negative value
display is displayed to indicate a decimal negative
value. There is no negative value display for a
hexadecimal negative value.)
Revision June 2010
4-5
Chapter 4 Display and Operation
NOTE
1) Dec. represents Decimal display and Hex. represents Hexadecimal display.
2) The above display methods are both available in monitor mode and parameter setting mode.
3) All monitor variables are 32-bit data. The users can switch to high byte or low byte and display
format
(Dec. or Hex.) freely. Regarding the parameters listed in Chapter 8, for each
parameter, only one kind of
display format is available and cannot be changed.
4-6
Revision June 2010
Chapter 4 Display and Operation
4.4 General Function Operation
4.4.1 Fault Code Display Operation
After entering the parameter mode P4-00 to P4-04 (Fault Record), press SET key to display
the corresponding fault code history for the parameter.
Figure 4.3
Revision June 2010
4-7
Chapter 4 Display and Operation
4.4.2 JOG Operation
After entering parameter mode P4-05, the users can follow the following steps to perform
JOG operation. (Please also refer to Figure 4.4).
Step1. Press the SET key to display the JOG speed. (The default value is 20 r/min).
Step2. Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to increase or decrease the desired JOG speed.
(This also can be undertaken by using the SHIFT key to move the cursor to the
desired unit column (the effected number will blink) then changed using the UP
and DOWN arrow keys. The example display in Figure 4.4 is adjusted as 100
r/min.)
Step3. Press the SET key when the desired JOG speed is set. The Servo Drive will display
"JOG".
Step4. Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to jog the motor either CCW or CW. The motor
will only rotate while the arrow key is activated.
Step5. To change JOG speed again, press the MODE key. The servo Drive will display "P4 -
05". Press the SET key and the JOG speed will displayed again. Refer back to #2
and #3 to change speed.
NOTE
1) JOG operation is effective only when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
Figure 4.4
4-8
Revision June 2010
Chapter 4 Display and Operation
4.4.3 Force Output Control Operation
For testing, the digital outputs can be forced to be activated (ON) or inactivated (OFF) by
using parameter P2-08 and P4-06. First, set P2-08 to 406 to enable the force output
control function and then using P4-06 to force the digital outputs to be activated. Follow
the setting method in Figure 4.5 to enter into Force Output Control operation mode.
When P4-06 is set to 2, the digital output, DO2 is activated. When P4-06 is set to 7, the
digital outputs, DO1, DO2 and DO3 are both activated. The parameter setting value of P406 is not retained when power is off. After re-power the servo drive, all digital outputs will
return to the normal status. If P2-08 is set to 400, it also can switch the Force Output
Control operation mode to normal Digital Output (DO) Control operation mode.
The DO function and status is determined by P2-18 to P2-22. This function is enabled
only when Servo Off (the servo drive is disabled).
Figure 4.5
NOTE
1) As the display of P4-06 is hexadecimal, 0(zero) of the fifth digit will not show on the LED
display.
Revision June 2010
4-9
Chapter 4 Display and Operation
4.4.4 DI Diagnosis Operation
Following the setting method in Figure 4.6 can perform DI diagnosis operation (parameter
P4-07, Input Status). According to the ON and OFF status of the digital inputs DI1 to DI9,
the corresponding status will display on the servo drive LED display. When the Bit is set to
“1”, it means that the corresponding digital input signal is ON. (Please also refer to Figure
4.6)
For example:
Suppose that the servo drive LED display is “1E1”.
“E” is hexadecimal, which is equal to “1110” in binary system, and it means that the
digital inputs DI6 ~ DI8 are ON.
Figure 4.6
(Hexadecimal Display)
4-10
Revision June 2010
Chapter 4 Display and Operation
4.4.5 DO Diagnosis Operation
Following the setting method in Figure 4.7 can perform DO diagnosis operation
(parameter P4-09, Output Status Display). According to the ON and OFF status of the
digital outputs DO1 to DO6, the corresponding status will display on the servo drive LED
display. When the Bit is set to “1”, it means that the corresponding digital output signal is
ON. (Please also refer to Figure 4.7)
For example:
Suppose that the servo drive LED display is “3F”.
“F” is hexadecimal, which is equal to “1111” in binary system, and it means that the
digital outputs DO1 ~ DO4 are ON.
Figure 4.7
(Hexadecimal Display)
Revision June 2010
4-11
Chapter 4 Display and Operation
This page intentionally left blank.
4-12
Revision June 2010
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
This chapter, which is divided into two parts, describes trial run for servo drive and motor.
One part is to introduce the trial run without load, and the other part is to introduce trial run
with load. Ensure to complete the trial run without load first before performing the trial run
with load.
5.1 Inspection without Load
In order to prevent accidents and avoid damaging the servo drive and mechanical system, the
trial run should be performed under no load condition (no load connected, including
disconnecting all couplings and belts). Do not run servo motor while it is connected to load or
mechanical system because the unassembled parts on motor shaft may easily disassemble
during running and it may damage mechanical system or even result in personnel injury. After
removing the load or mechanical system from the servo motor, if the servo motor can runs
normally following up the normal operation procedure (when trial run without load is
completed), then the users can connect to the load and mechanical system to run the servo
motor.
¾ In order to prevent accidents, the initial trial run for servo motor should be conducted
under no load conditions (separate the motor from its couplings and belts).
¾ Caution: Please perform trial run without load first and then perform trial run with load
connected. After the servo motor is running normally and regularly without load, then
run servo motor with load connected. Ensure to perform trial run in this order to prevent
unnecessary danger.
Revision June 2010
5-1
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
After power in connected to AC servo drive, the charge LED will light and it indicates that AC
servo drive is ready. Please check the followings before trial run:
Item
Content
z Inspect the servo drive and servo motor to insure they were not
damaged.
z To avoid an electric shock, be sure to connect the ground terminal of
servo drive to the ground terminal of control panel.
z Before making any connection, wait 10 minutes for capacitors to
discharge after the power is disconnected, alternatively, use an
appropriate discharge device to discharge.
z Ensure that all wiring terminals are correctly insulated.
z Ensure that all wiring is correct or damage and or malfunction may
Inspection before
result.
operation
z Visually check to ensure that there are not any unused screws, metal
(Control power is
strips, or any conductive or inflammable materials inside the drive.
not applied)
z Never put inflammable objects on servo drive or close to the external
regenerative resistor.
z Make sure control switch is OFF.
z If the electromagnetic brake is being used, ensure that it is correctly
wired.
z If required, use an appropriate electrical filter to eliminate noise to the
servo drive.
z Ensure that the external applied voltage to the drive is correct and
matched to the controller.
z Ensure that the cables are not damaged, stressed excessively or loaded
heavily. When the motor is running, pay close attention on the
connection of the cables and notice that if they are damaged, frayed or
over extended.
z Check for abnormal vibrations and sounds during operation. If the
servo motor is vibrating or there are unusual noises while the motor is
running, please contact the dealer or manufacturer for assistance.
z Ensure that all user-defined parameters are set correctly. Since the
Inspection during
characteristics of various machinery equipment are different, in order
operation
to avoid accident or cause damage, do not adjust the parameter
abnormally and ensure the parameter setting is not an excessive value.
(Control power is
applied))
z Ensure to reset some parameters when the servo drive is off (Please
refer to Chapter 7). Otherwise, it may result in malfunction.
z If there is no contact sound or there be any unusual noises when the
relay of the servo drive is operating, please contact your distributor for
assistance or contact with Delta.
z Check for abnormal conditions of the power indicators and LED display.
If there is any abnormal condition of the power indicators and LED
display, please contact your distributor for assistance or contact with
Delta.
5-2
Revision June 2010
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
5.2 Applying Power to the Drive
The users please observe the following steps when applying power supply to the servo drive.
1. Please check and confirm the wiring connection between the drive and motor is correct.
1) Terminal U, V, W and FG (frame ground) must connect to Red, White, Black and Green
cables separately (U: Red, V: White, W: Black, FG: Green). If not connect to the
specified cable and terminal, then the drive cannot control motor. The motor
grounding lead, FG must connect to grounding terminal. For more information of
cables, please refer to section 3.1.
2) Ensure to connect encoder cable to CN2 connector correctly. If the users only desire
to execute JOG operation, it is not necessary to make any connection to CN1 and CN3
connector. For more information of the connection of CN2 connector, please refer to
Section 3.1 and 3.4.
¾ Do not connect the AC input power (R, S, T) to the (U, V, W) output terminals. This will
damage the AC servo drive.
2. Main circuit wiring
Connect power to the AC servo. For three-phase input power connection and single-phase
input power connection, please refer to Section 3.1.3.
3. Turn the Power On
The Power includes control circuit power (L1c, L2c) and main circuit power (R, S, T). When
the power is on, the normal display should be shown as the following figure:
As the default settings of digital input signal, DI6, DI7 and DI8 are Reverse Inhibit Limit
(NL), Forward Inhibit Limit (PL) and Emergency Stop (EMGS) respectively, if the users do not
want to use the default settings of DI6~DI8, the users can change their settings by using
parameters P2-15 to P2-17 freely. When the setting value of parameters P2-15 to P2-17 is
0, it indicates the function of this DI signal is disabled. For more information of
parameters P2-15 to P2-17, please refer to Chapter 7 “Parameters”.
If the parameter P0-02 is set as motor speed (06), the normal display should be shown as
the following figure:
If there is no text or character displayed on the LED display, please check if the voltage of
the control circuit terminal (L1c and L2c) is over low.
Revision June 2010
5-3
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
1) When display shows:
Over voltage:
The main circuit voltage has exceeded its maximum allowable value or input power is
error (Incorrect power input).
Corrective Actions:
„
Use voltmeter to check whether the input voltage falls within the rated input
voltage.
„
Use voltmeter to check whether the input voltage is within the specified limit.
2) When display shows:
Encoder error:
Check if the wiring is correct. Check if the encoder wiring (CN2) of servo motor is loose
or incorrect.
Corrective Actions:
„
Check if the users perform wiring recommended in the user manual.
„
Examine the encoder connector and cable.
„
Inspect whether wire is loose or not.
„
Check if the encoder is damaged.
3) When display shows:
Emergency stop activated:
Please check if any of digital inputs DI1~DI9 signal is set to “Emergency Stop” (EMGS).
Corrective Actions:
„
If it does not need to use “Emergency Stop (EMGS)” as input signal, the users only
need to confirm that if all of the digital inputs DI1~DI8 are not set to “Emergency
5-4
Revision June 2010
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
Stop (EMGS)”. (The setting value of parameter P2-10 to P2-17 and P2-36 is not set
to 21.)
„
If it is necessary to use “Emergency Stop (EMGS)” as input signal, the users only
need to confirm that which of digital inputs DI1~DI9 is set to “Emergency Stop
(EMGS)” and check if the digital input signal is ON (It should be activated).
4) When display shows:
Reverse limit switch error:
Please check if any of digital inputs DI1~DI9 signal is set to “Reverse inhibit limit (NL)”
and check if the signal is ON or not.
Corrective Actions:
„
If it does not need to use “Reverse inhibit limit (NL)” as input signal, the users only
need to confirm that if all of the digital inputs DI1~DI9 are not set to “Reverse
inhibit limit (NL)”. (The setting value of parameter P2-10 to P2-17 and P2-36 is not
set to 22.)
„
If it is necessary to use “Reverse inhibit limit (NL)” as input signal, the users only
need to confirm that which of digital inputs DI1~DI9 is set to “Reverse inhibit limit
(NL)” and check if the digital input signal is ON (It should be activated).
5) When display shows:
Forward limit switch error:
Please check if any of digital inputs DI1~DI9 signal is set to “Forward inhibit limit (PL)”
and check if the signal is ON or not.
Corrective Actions:
„
If it is no need to use “Forward inhibit limit (PL)” as input signal, the users only
need to confirm that if all of the digital inputs DI1~DI9 are not set to “Forward
inhibit limit (PL)”. (The setting value of parameter P2-10 to P2-17 and P2-36 is not
set to 23.)
Revision June 2010
5-5
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
„
If it is necessary to use “Forward inhibit limit (PL)” as input signal, the users only
need to confirm that which of digital inputs DI1~DI9 is set to “Forward inhibit limit
(PL)” and check if the digital input signal is ON (It should be activated).
When “Digital Input 1 (DI1)” is set to Servo On (SON), if DI1 is set to ON (it indicates that
Servo On (SON) function is enabled) and the following fault message shows on the
display:
6) When display shows:
Overcurrent:
Corrective Actions:
„
Check the wiring connections between the servo drive and motor.
„
Check if the circuit of the wiring is closed.
„
Remove the short-circuited condition and avoid metal conductor being exposed.
7) When display shows:
Undervoltage:
Corrective Actions:
„
Check whether the wiring of main circuit input voltage is normal.
„
Use voltmeter to check whether input voltage of main circuit is normal.
„
Use voltmeter to check whether the input voltage is within the specified
specification.
NOTE
1) If there are any unknown fault codes and abnormal display when applying power to the drive
or servo on is activated (without giving any command), please inform the distributor or contact
with Delta for assistance.
5-6
Revision June 2010
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
5.3 JOG Trial Run without Load
It is very convenient to use JOG trial run without load to test the servo drive and motor as it
can save the wiring. The external wiring is not necessary and the users only need to connect
the digital keypad to the servo drive. For safety, it is recommended to set JOG speed at low
speed. Please refer to the following steps to perform JOG trial run without load.
STEP 1: Turn the drive ON through software. Ensure that the setting value of parameter P230 should be set to 1 (Servo On).
STEP 2: Set parameter P4-05 as JOG speed (unit: r/min). After the desired JOG speed is set,
and then press SET key, the drive will enter into JOG operation mode automatically
STEP 3: The users can press UP and DOWN key to change JOG speed and press SHIFT key to
adjust the digit number of the displayed value.
STEP 4: Pressing SET key can determine the speed of JOG operation.
STEP 5: Pressing UP key and the servo motor will run in CCW direction. After releasing UP key,
the motor will stop running.
STEP 6: Pressing DOWN key and the servo motor will run in CW direction. After releasing
DOWN key, the motor will stop running.
N(CW) and P(CCW) Definition:
CCW (Counterclockwise): when facing the servo motor shaft, CCW is reverse running.
CW (Clockwise): when facing the servo motor shaft, CW is forward running.
STEP 7: When pressing MODE key, it can exit JOG operation mode.
Revision June 2010
5-7
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
In the example below, the JOG speed is adjusted from 20r/min (Default setting) to 100r/min.
5-8
Revision June 2010
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
5.4 Speed Trial Run without Load
Before speed trial run, fix and secure the motor as possible to avoid the danger from the
reacting force when motor speed changes.
STEP 1:
Set the value of parameter P1-01 to 02 and it is speed (S) control mode. After selecting the
operation mode as speed (S) control mode, please restart the drive as P1-01 is effective only
after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and on).
STEP 2:
In speed control mode, the necessary Digital Inputs are listed as follows:
Digital Input
Parameter Setting
Value
Sign
Function Description
CN1 PIN No.
DI1
P2-10=101
SON
Servo On
DI1-=9
DI2
P2-11=109
TRQLM
Torque limit enabled
DI2-=10
DI3
P2-12=114
SPD0
Speed command selection
DI3-=34
DI4
P2-13=115
SPD1
Speed command selection
DI4-=8
DI5
P2-14=102
ARST
Reset
DI5-=33
DI6
P2-15=0
Disabled
This DI function is disabled
-
DI7
P2-16=0
Disabled
This DI function is disabled
-
DI8
P2-17=0
Disabled
This DI function is disabled
-
DI9
P2-36=0
Disabled
This DI function is disabled
-
By default, DI6 is the function of reverse inhibit limit, DI7 is the function of forward inhibit
limit and DI6 is the function of emergency stop (DI8), if the users do not set the setting value
of parameters P2-15 to P2-17 and P2-36 to 0 (Disabled), the faults (ALE13, 14 and 15) will
occur (For the information of fault messages, please refer to Chapter 10). Therefore, if the
users do not need to use these three digit inputs, please set the setting value of parameters
P2-15 to P2-17 and P2-36 to 0 (Disabled) in advance.
All the digital inputs of Delta ASDA-B2 series are user-defined, and the users can set the DI
signals freely. Ensure to refer to the definitions of DI signals before defining them (For the
description of DI signals, please refer to Table 7.A in Chapter 7). If any alarm code displays
after the setting is completed, the users can restart the drive or set DI5 to be activated to
clear the fault. Please refer to section 5.2.
Revision June 2010
5-9
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
The speed command is selected by SPD0, SPD1. Please refer to the following table:
DI signal of CN1
Speed
Command No.
SPD1
SPD0
S1
0
0
S2
0
1
S3
1
0
S4
1
1
Command Source
Content
Range
External analog
command
Voltage between V-REF
and GND
-10V ~ +10V
P1-09
-50000 ~ 50000
P1-10
-50000 ~ 50000
P1-11
-50000 ~ 50000
Internal parameter
0: indicates OFF (Normally Open); 1: indicates ON (Normally Closed)
The range of internal parameter is from -50000 to 50000.
Setting value of speed command = Setting range x unit (0.1 r/min).
For example:
If P1-09 is set to +30000, the setting value of speed command = +30000 x 0.1 r/min = +3000
r/min.
The settings of speed command:
P1-09 is set to 30000
Input value
command
Rotation direction
P1-10 is set to 1000
+
CW
P1-11 is set to -30000
-
CCW
STEP 3:
1.
The users can use DI1 to enable the servo drive (Servo ON).
2.
If DI3 (SPD0) and DI4 (SPD1) are OFF both, it indicates S1 command is selected. At this
time, the motor is operating according to external analog command.
3.
If only DI3 is ON (SPD0), it indicates S2 command (P1-09 is set to 3000) is selected, and
the motor speed is 3000r/min at this time.
4.
If only DI4 is ON (SPD1), it indicates S3 command (P1-10 is set to 100) is selected, and
the motor speed is 100r/min at this time.
5.
If DI3 (SPD0) and DI4 (SPD1) are ON both, it indicates S4 command (P1-11 is set to 3000) is selected, and the motor speed is -3000r/min at this time.
6.
Repeat the action of (3), (4), (5) freely.
7.
When the users want to stop the speed trial run, use DI1 to disable the servo drive
(Servo OFF).
5-10
Revision June 2010
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
5.5 Tuning Procedure
Estimate the ratio of Load Inertia to Servo Motor Inertia (J_load /J_motor): JOG Mode
Tuning Procedure
1.
After wiring is completed, when power in connected to the AC servo
drive, the right side display will show on the LCD display.
2.
Press MODE key to enter into parameter mode.
3.
Press SHIFT key twice to select parameter group.
4.
Press UP key to view each parameter and select parameter P2-17.
5.
Press SET key to display the parameter value as shown on the right
side.
6.
Press SHIFT key twice to change the parameter values. Use UP key to
cycle through the available settings and then press SET key to
determine the parameter settings.
7.
Press UP key to view each parameter and select parameter P2-30.
8.
Press SET key to display the parameter value as shown on the right
side.
9.
Select parameter value 1. Use UP key to cycle through the available
settings.
Display
10. At this time, the servo drive is ON and the right side display will
appear next.
11. Press DOWN key three times to select the ratio of Load Inertia to
Servo Motor Inertia (J_load /J_motor).
12. Display the current ratio of Load Inertia to Servo Motor Inertia (J_load
/J_motor). (5.0 is default setting.)
13. Press MODE key to select parameter mode.
14. Press SHIFT key twice to select parameter group.
15. Press UP key to select user parameter P4-05.
16. Press SET key and JOG speed 20r/min will be displayed. Press UP and
DOWN key to increase and decrease JOG speed. To press SHIFT key
one time can add one digit number.
17. Select desired JOG speed, press SET key and it will show the right
side display.
18. Pressing UP key is forward rotation and pressing DOWN key is reverse rotation.
19. Execute JOG operation in low speed first. After the machine is running smoothly, then
execute JOG operation in high speed.
Revision June 2010
5-11
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
Tuning Procedure
Display
20. The ratio of Load Inertia to Servo Motor Inertia (J_load /J_motor) cannot be shown in the
display of JOG parameter P4-05 operation. Please press MODE key twice continuously and
the users can see the ratio of Load Inertia to Servo Motor Inertia (J_load /J_motor). Then,
execute JOG operation again, press MODE key once and press SET key twice to view the
display on the keypad. Check if the value of J_load /J_motor is adjusted to a fixed value
and displayed on the keypad after acceleration and deceleration repeatedly.
5.5.1 Tuning Flowchart
5-12
Revision June 2010
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
5.5.2 Load Inertia Estimation Flowchart
Revision June 2010
5-13
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
5.5.3 Auto Mode Tuning Flowchart
Set P2-32 to 1 (1: Auto Mode [Continuous adjustment] )
The servo drive will continuously estimate the system inertia, save the measured load
inertia value automatically and memorized in P1-37 every 30 minutes by referring to the
frequency response settings of P2-31.
P2-31 : Auto Mode Stiffness Setting (Default setting: 80)
In Auto mode and Semi-Auto mode, the speed loop frequency response settings are as
follows:
1 ~ 50Hz : Low stiffness and low frequency response
51 ~ 250Hz : Medium stiffness and medium frequency response
251 ~ 550Hz : High stiffness and high frequency response
Adjust P2-31: Increase the setting value of P2-31 to enhance the stiffness or reduce the
noise. Continuously perform the adjustment until the satisfactory performance is
achieved.
5-14
Revision June 2010
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
5.5.4 Semi-Auto Mode Tuning Flowchart
Set P2-32 to 2 (2: Semi-Auto Mode [Non-continuous adjustment] )
The servo drive will continuously perform the adjustment for a period of time. After the
system inertia becomes stable, it will stop estimating the system inertia, save the
measured load inertia value automatically, and memorized in P1-37. When switching from
other modes, such as Manual Mode or Auto Mode, to Semi-Auto Mode, the servo drive will
perform continuous adjustment for estimating the load inertia (P1-37) again. The servo
drive will refer to the frequency response settings of P2-31 when estimating the system
inertia.
P2-31 : Auto Mode Stiffness Setting (Default setting: 80)
In Auto mode and Semi-Auto mode, the speed loop frequency response settings are as
follows:
1 ~ 50Hz : Low stiffness and low frequency response
51 ~ 250Hz : Medium stiffness and medium frequency response
251 ~ 550Hz : High stiffness and high frequency response
Adjust P2-31: Increase the setting value of P2-31 to enhance the frequency response or
reduce the noise.Continuously perform the adjustment until the satisfactory performance
is achieved.
Revision June 2010
5-15
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
NOTE
1) When bit0 of P2-33 is set to 1, it indicates that the system inertia estimation of semi-auto mode has been
completed and the measured load inertia value is saved and memorized in P1-37 automatically.
2) If reset bit0 of P2-33 to 0, it will start estimating the system inertia again.
5-16
Revision June 2010
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
5.5.5 Limit of Load Inertia Estimation
The accel. / decel. time for reaching 2000r/min must be below 1 second.
The rotation speed must be above 200r/min.
The load inertia must be 100 multiple or less of motor inertia.
The change of external force and the inertia ratio can not be too much.
In Auto Mode (P2-32 is set to 1), the measured load inertia value will be saved
automatically and memorized in P1-37 every 30 minutes. In Semi-Auto Mode, it will stop
estimating the load inertia after a period of continuous adjustment time when the system
inertia becomes stable. The measured load inertia value will be saved automatically and
memorized in P1-37 when load inertia estimation is stopped.
Revision June 2010
5-17
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
NOTE
1) Parameters P2-44 and P2-46 are used to set notch filter attenuation rate. If the resonance can
not be suppressed when the setting values of P2-44 and P2-46 are set to 32bB (the maximum
value), please decrease the speed loop frequency response. After setting P2-47, the users can
check the setting values of P2-44 and P2-46. If the setting value of P2-44 is not 0, it indicates
that one resonance frequency exists in the system and then the users can read P2-43, i.e. the
frequency (unit is Hz) of the resonance point. When there is any resonance point in the system,
its information will be shown in P2-45 and P2-46 as P2-43 and P2-44.
2) If the resonance conditions are not improved when P2-47 is set to 1 for over three times,
please adjust notch filters (resonance suppression parameters) manually to or eliminate the
resonance.
5-18
Revision June 2010
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
5.5.6 Mechanical Resonance Suppression Method
In order to suppress the high frequency resonance of the mechanical system, ASDA-B2
series servo drive provides three notch filters (resonance suppression parameters) for
resonance suppression. Two notch filters can be set to suppress the resonance
automatically. If the users do not want to suppress the resonance automatically, these
two notch filter can also be set to or eliminate the resonance manually.
Please refer to the following flowchart for manual adjustment.
Revision June 2010
5-19
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
5.5.7 Relationship between Tuning Modes and Parameters
Tuning Mode
Manual Mode
Auto Mode
[Continuous
Adjustment]
Semi-Auto Mode
[Non-continuous
Adjustment]
P2-32
0(Default
setting)
AutoSet
Parameter
User-defined Parameter
Gain Value
None
P1-37 (Ratio of Load Inertia to Servo
Motor Inertia [J_load / J_motor])
P2-00 (Proportional Position Loop
Gain)
P2-04 (Proportional Speed Loop Gain)
P2-06 (Speed Integral Compensation)
P2-25 (Low-pass Filter Time Constant
of Resonance Suppression)
P2-26 (External Anti-Interference Gain)
Fixed
1
P1-37
P2-00
P2-02
P2-04
P2-06
P2-25
P2-26
P2-49
2
P1-37
P2-00
P2-02
P2-04
P2-06
P2-25
P2-26
P2-49
P2-31 (Auto Stiffness and Frequency
response Level)
Continuous
Adjusting
(every 30
minutes)
P2-31 (Auto Stiffness and Frequency
response Level)
Noncontinuous
Adjusting
(stop after a
period of
time)
When switching mode #1 to #0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06, P2-25,
P2-26 and P2-49 will change to the value that measured in #1 auto-tuning mode.
When switching mode #2 to #0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06, P2-25,
P2-26 and P2-49 will change to the value that measured in #2 semi-auto tuning mode.
5-20
Revision June 2010
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
5.5.8 Gain Adjustment in Manual Mode
The position and speed responsiveness selection is depending on and determined by the
the control stiffness of machinery and conditions of applications. Generally, high
reponsiveness is essential for the high frequency positioning control of mechanical
facilities and the applications of high precision process system. However, the higher
responsiveness may easily result in the resonance of machinery system. Therefore, for the
applications of high responsiveness, the machinery system with control stiffness is
needed to avoid the resonance. Especially when adjusting the responsiveness of
unfamiliar machinery system, the users can gradually increase the gain setting value to
improve responsiveness untill the resonance occurs, and then decrease the gain setting
value. The relevant parameters and gain adjusting methods are described as follows:
„
KPP, Parameter P2-00 Proportional Position Loop Gain
This parameter is used to determine the responsiveness of position loop (position
loop gain). It could be used to increase stiffness, expedite position loop response
and reduce position error. When the setting value of KPP is higher, the response to
the position command is quicker, the position error is less and the settling time is
also shorter. However, if the setting value is over high, the machinery system may
generate vibration or noise, or even overshoot during positioning. The position loop
responsiveness is calculated as follows:
„
KVP, Parameter P2-04 Proportional Speed Loop Gain
This parameter is used to determine the frequency response of speed loop (speed
loop gain). It could be used to expedite speed loop response. When the setting value
of KVP is higher, the response to the speed command is quicker. However, if the
setting value is over high, it may result in the resonance of machinery system. The
frequency response of speed loop must be higher than the 4~6 times of the
frequency response of position loop. If frequency response of position loop is higher
than the frequency response of speed loop, the machinery system may generate
vibration or noise, or even overshoot during positioning. The speed loop frequency
response is calculated as follows:
JM: Motor Inertia
JL: Load Inertia
P1-37: 0.1 times
When the value of P1-37 (no matter it is the measured load inertia value or the set
load inertia value) is equal to the actual load inertia value, the actual speed loop
frequency response will be:
=
K VP
Hz
2
.
Revision June 2010
5-21
Chapter 5 Trial Run and Tuning Procedure
„
KVI, Parameter P2-06 Speed Integral Compensation
If the setting value of KVI is higher, the capability of decreasing the speed control
deviation is better. However, if the setting value is over high, it may easily result in
the vibration of machinery system. The recommended setting value is as follows:
„
NLP, Parameter P2-25 Low-pass Filter Time Constant of Resonance Suppression
When the value of (J_load / J_motor) is high, the responsiveness of speed loop may
decrease. At this time, the users can increase the setting value of KVP (P2-04) to
keep the responsiveness of speed loop. However, when increasing the setting value
of KVP (P2-04), it may easily result in the vibration of machinery system. Please use
this parameter to suppress or eliminate the noise of resonance. If the setting value
of NLP is higher, the capability of improving the noise of resonance is better.
However, if the setting value is over high, it may easily lead to the instability of
speed loop and overshoot of machinery system.
The recommended setting value is as follows:
„
DST, Parameter P2-26 External Anti-Interference Gain
This parameter is used to enhance the anti-interference capability and reduce the
occurrence of overshoot. The default setting is 0 (Disabled). It is not recommended
to use it in manual mode only when performing a few tuning on the value gotten
through P2-32 AutoMode (PDFF) (setting value is 5, mode 5) automatically (The
setting value of P2-26 will change to the value that measured in mode 5 (AutoMode
(PDFF)) when switching mode 5 ((AutoMode (PDFF)) to mode 0 (Manual mode)).
„
PFG, Parameter P2-02 Position Feed Forward Gain
This parameter is used to reduce position error and shorten the positioning settling
time. However, if the setting value is over high, it may easily lead to the overshoot of
machinery system. If the value of electronic gear ratio (1-44/1-45) is over than 10,
the machinery system may also easily generate vibration or noise.
5-22
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.1 Control Modes of Operation
The Delta ASDA-B2 series can be programmed to provide six single and five dual modes of
operation. Their operation and description is listed in the following table.
Mode
External Position Control
Speed Control
Single
Mode
Internal Speed Control
Torque Control
Code
Description
P
External Position control mode for the servo motor
is achieved via an external pulse command.
S
(External / Internal) Speed control mode for the
servo motor can be achieved via parameters set
within the controller or from an external analog -10
~ +10 VDC command. Control of the internal speed
mode is via the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of
three speeds can be stored internally).
Sz
Internal Speed control mode for the servo motor is
only achieved via parameters set within the
controller. Control of the internal speed mode is via
the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of three speeds
can be stored internally).
T
(External / Internal) Torque control mode for the
servo motor can be achieved via parameters set
within the controller or from an external analog -10
~ +10 VDC command. Control of the internal torque
mode is via the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of
three torque levels can be stored internally).
Tz
Internal Torque control mode for the servo motor is
only achieved via parameters set within the
controller. Control of the internal torque mode is
via the Digital Inputs (DI). (A maximum of three
torque levels can be stored internally).
S-P
Either S or P control mode can be selected via the
Digital Inputs (DI)
T-P
Either T or P control mode can be selected via the
Digital Inputs (DI)
S-T
Either S or T control mode can be selected via the
Digital Inputs (DI)
Internal Torque Control
Dual Mode
The steps of changing mode:
(1)
Switching the servo drive to Servo Off status. Turning SON signal of Digit input to be off
can complete this action.
(2)
Using parameter P1-01. (Refer to chapter 7).
(3)
After the setting is completed, cut the power off and restart the drive again.
The following sections describe the operation of each control mode, including control
structure, command source and loop gain adjustment, etc.
Revision June 2010
6-1
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.2 Position Control Mode
The position control mode is usually used for the applications requiring precision positioning,
such as industry positioning machine, indexing table etc. The external pulse train with
direction which can control the rotation angle of servo motor. The max. input frequency for
the external pulse command is 4Mpps.
For the closed-loop positioning, speed control loop is the principal part and the auxiliary
parameters are position loop gain and feed forward compensation. The users can also select
two kinds of tuning mode (Manual/Auto modes) to perform gain adjustment. This Section 6.2
mainly describes the applicability of loop gain adjustment and feed forward compensation of
Delta servo system.
6.2.1 Command Source of Position (PT) Control Mode
The command source of P mode is external pulse train input form terminals. There are
three types of pulse input and each pulse type is with·logic type (positive (+), negative (-)).
They all can be set in parameter P1-00. Please refer to the following relevant parameters:
P1 - 00▲ PTT
Communication Addr.:
0100H, 0101H
External Pulse Input Type
Default: 2
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Section 6.2.1
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 1132
Data Size: 16bit
Display Format: HEX
Settings:
• Value A: Pulse type
A=0: AB phase pulse (4x)
A
B
C
not used
A=1: CW + CCW pulse
A=2: Pulse + Direction
Other settings:
B: Input pulse filter
This setting is used to suppress or reduce the chatter caused by the noise, etc.
However, if the instant input pulse filter frequency is over high, the frequency that
exceeds the setting value will be regarded as noise and filtered.
B
0
1
2
3
6-2
Low Filter
1.66Mpps
416Kpps
208Kpps
104Kpps
Setting Value
0
1
2
3
High Filter
6.66Mpps
1.66Mpps
833Kpps
416Kpps
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
• Value C: Logic type
Logic
Pulse Type
Forward
Reverse
AB phase
pulse
0
Positive
Logic
CW + CCW
pulse
Pulse +
Direction
AB phase
pulse
1
Negativ
e Logic
CW + CCW
pulse
Pulse +
Direction
Pulse specification
High-speed pulse
Low-speed pulse
Low-speed
pulse
Min. time width
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
Line
receiver
4Mpps
Line driver
500Kpps
0.5μs
1μs
2μs
2μs
1μs
1μs
Open
collector
200Kpps
1.25μs
2.5μs
5μs
5μs
2.5μs
2.5μs
62.5ns 125ns 250ns 200ns 125ns 125ns
Max. input pulse
frequency
Voltage
specification
Forward specification
Line
receiver
4Mpps
5V
< 25mA
Line
driver
500Kpps
2.8V ~ 3.7V
< 25mA
Open
collector
200Kpps
24V (Max.)
< 25mA
Pulse specification
High-speed
pulse
Max. input
pulse
frequency
• Source of pulse command
Setting
value
Input pulse interface
0
Open collector for
low-speed pulse
CN1 Terminal Identification:
PULSE, SIGN
1
Line driver for
high-speed pulse
CN1 Terminal Identification:
PULSE_D, SIGN_D
Revision June 2010
Remark
6-3
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
The source of pulse command can also be determined by digital input, PTCMS. When the
digital input function is used, the source of pulse command is from digital input.
Position pulse can be input from these terminals, PULSE (41), /PULSE (43), HPULSE (38),
/HPULSE (36), SIGN (37), /SIGN (39) and HSIGN (42), /HSIGN (40). It can be an open-collector
circuit or line driver circuit. For the detail wiring, please refer to 3.6.1.
6.2.2 Structure of Position Control Mode
Basic Structure:
In order to pursue the goal of perfection in position control, the pulse signal should be
modified through position command processing and the structure is shown as the figure
below:
Using parameter P1-01 can select P mode. Electronic gear ratio can be set in P modes to
set proper position revolution. ASDA-B2 series servo drive also provides low-pass filter,
which are used whenever the motor and load need to be operated more smoothly. As for
the information of electronic gear ratio, and low-pass filter, please refer to the following
sections 6.2.3 and 6.2.4.
6-4
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
Pulse Inhibit Input Function (INHP)
INHP is activated via digital inputs (Please refer to parameter P2-10 ~ P2-17,P2-36 and DI
INHP(07) in Table 7.1).When the drive is in position mode, if INHP is activated, the
external pulse input command is not valid and the motor will stop.
6.2.3 Electronic Gear Ratio
Relevant parameters:
P1 - 44▲ GR1
Electronic Gear Ratio (1st Numerator) (N1)
Communication Addr.:
0158H, 0159H
Default: 16
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Section 6.2.5
Unit: Pulse
Range: 1 ~(226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
Multiple-step electronic gear numerator setting. Please refer to P2-60~P2-62.
Please note:
1. In PT mode, the setting value of P1-44 can’t be changed when the servo drive is
enabled (Servo On).
P1 - 45▲ GR2
Electronic Gear Ratio (Denominator)
Communication Addr.:
015AH, 015BH
Default: 10
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Section 6.3.6
Unit: Pulse
Range: 1 ~(231-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
As the wrong setting can cause motor to run chaotically (out of control) and it may
lead to personnel injury, therefore, ensure to observe the following rule when
setting P1-44, P1-45.
The electronic gear ratio setting:
Pulse input
f1
N
M
Position
command
N
f2 = f1 x M
f1: Pulse input
f2: Position command
N: Numerator 1, 2, 3, 4, the setting value of P1-44
or P2-60 ~ P2-63
M: Denominator, the setting value of P1-45
Revision June 2010
6-5
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
The electronic gear ratio setting range must be within: 1/50<N/M<25600.
Please note:
In PT mode, the setting value of P1-45 can’t be changed when the servo drive is
enabled (Servo On).
The electronic gear function provides easy travel distance ratio change. However, the over
high electronic gear ratio will command the motor to move not smoothly. At this time, the
users can use low-pass filter parameter to improve this kind of situation. For example,
assume that the electronic gear ratio is equal to 1 and the encoder pulse per revolution is
10000ppr, if the electronic gear ratio is changed to 0.5, then the motor will rotate one
pulse when the command from external controller is two pulses.
For example, after the proper electronic gear ratio is set, the reference travel distance is 1
μm/pulse, the machinery will become easier to be used.
Electronic Gear Ratio
When the electronic
gear ratio is not
used
When the electronic
gear ratio is used
6-6
=
=
1
1
1000 0
300 0
Corresponding travel distance per
pulse
=
3x 100 0
300 0
=
4x 250 0 100 00
m
=1 m
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.2.4 Low-pass Filter
Relevant parameters:
P1 - 08
PFLT
Smooth Constant of Position Command
(Low-pass Filter)
Communication Addr.:
0110H, 0111H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Section 6.2.6
Unit: 10ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Position
Tar get pos ition
Time (ms)
PF LT
6.2.5 Position Loop Gain Adjustment
Before performing position control (setting position control block diagram), the users
should complete the speed control setting by using Manual mode (parameter P-32) since
the position loop contains speed loop. Then, adjust the Proportional Position Loop Gain,
KPP (parameter P2-00) and Position Feed Forward Gain, PFG (parameter P2-02). Or use
Auto mode to adjust the gain of speed and position control block diagram automatically.
1) Proportional Position Loop Gain: To increase this gain can enhance the position loop
responsiveness.
2) Position Feed Forward Gain: To increase this gain can reduce the position track error
during operation.
The position loop responsiveness cannot exceed the speed loop responsiveness, and it is
recommended that the speed loop responsiveness should be at least four times faster
than the position loop responsiveness. This also means that the setting value of
Proportional Speed Loop Gain, KVP should be at least four times faster than Proportional
Position Loop Gain, KPP.
The equation is shown as follows:
fp < fv
4 , fv : Speed Loop Responsiveness (Hz), fp : Position Loop Responsiveness (Hz)
KPP = 2 × π × fp.
Revision June 2010
6-7
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
For example, the desired position loop responsiveness is equal to 20 Hz.
Then, KPP = 2 × π × 20= 125 rad/s.
Relevant parameters:
P2 - 00
KPP
Proportional Position Loop Gain
Communication Addr.:
0200H, 0201H
Default: 35
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Section 6.2.8
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 2047
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the position loop gain. It can increase stiffness,
expedite position loop response and reduce position error. However, if the setting
value is over high, it may generate vibration or noise.
P2 - 02
PFG
Position Feed Forward Gain
Communication Addr.:
0204H, 0205H
Default: 50
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Section 6.2.8
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
This parameter is used to set the feed forward gain when executing position
control command. When using position smooth command, increase gain can
improve position track deviation. When not using position smooth command,
decrease gain can improve the resonance condition of mechanical system. However,
if the setting value is over high, it may generate vibration or noise.
6-8
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
When the value of Proportional Position Loop Gain, KPP is too great, the position loop
responsiveness will be increased and it will result in small phase margin. If this happens,
the rotor of motor will oscillate. At this time, the users have to decrease the value of KPP
until the rotor of motor stop oscillating. When there is an external torque command
interrupted, over low KPP value will let the motor cannot overcome the external strength
and fail to meet the requirement of reasonable position track error demand. Adjust feed
forward gain, PFG (P2-02) to efficiently reduce the dynamic position track error.
Revision June 2010
6-9
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.3 Speed Control Mode
The speed control mode (S or Sz) is usually used on the applications of precision speed
control, such as CNC machine, etc. ASDA-B2 series servo drive supports two kinds of
command sources in speed control mode. One is external analog signal and the other is
internal parameter. The external analog signal is from external voltage input and it can
control the speed of servo motor. There are two usage of internal parameter, one is set
different speed command in three speed control parameters before operation and then using
SPD0 and SPD1 of CN1 DI signal perform switching. The other usage is using serial
communication to change the setting value of parameter.
Beside, in order to make the speed command switch more smoothly, ASDA-B2 series servo
drive also provides complete S-curve profile for speed control mode. For the closed-loop
speed control, ASDA-B2 series servo drive provides gain adjustment function and an
integrated PI or PDFF controller. Besides, two modes of tuning technology (Manual/Auto) are
also provided for the users to select (parameter P2-32).
There are two turning modes for gain adjustment: Manual and Auto modes.
Manual Mode: User-defined loop gain adjustment. When using this mode, all auto and
„
auxiliary function will be disabled.
Auto Mode: Continuous adjustment of loop gains according to measured inertia, with ten
„
levels of system bandwidth. The parameter set by user is default value.
6.3.1 Command Source of Speed Control Mode
Speed command Sources:
1) External analog signal: External analog voltage input, -10V to +10V
2) Internal parameter: P1-09 to P1-11
Speed
Comman
d
S1
6-10
CN1 DI
signal
SPD1
0
Command Source
Content
Range
SPD0
0
S2
0
1
S3
1
0
S4
1
1
Mod
e
S
External
analog
signal
Voltage between
V-REF-GND
+/-10 V
Sz
N/A
Speed command is
0
0
Internal parameter
P1-09
-50000 ~
50000
P1-10
-50000 ~
50000
P1-11
-50000 ~
50000
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
„
State of SPD0~1: 0: indicates OFF (Normally Open); 1: indicates ON (Normally
Closed)
„
When SPD0 and SPD1 are both = 0 (OFF), if the control mode of operation is Sz,
then the speed command is 0. Therefore, if the users do not use analog voltage as
speed command, the users can choose Sz mode and avoid the zero point drift
problem of analog voltage signal. If the speed control mode is S mode, then the
command is the analog voltage between V-REF and GND. The setting range of the
input voltage is from -10V to +10V and the corresponding motor speed is
adjustable (Please see parameter P1-40).
„
When at least one of SPD0 and SPD1 is not 0 (OFF), the speed command is internal
parameter (P1-09 to P1-11). The command is valid (enabled) after either SPD0 or
SPD1 is changed.
„
The range of internal parameters is within -50000 ~ +50000 r/min. Setting value =
Range x Unit (0.1 r/min). For example, if P1-09 is set to +30000, the setting value
= +30000 x 0.1 r/min = +3000 r/min.
The speed command that is described in this section not only can be taken as speed
command in speed control mode (S or Sz mode) but also can be the speed limit input
command in torque control mode (T or Tz mode).
6.3.2 Structure of Speed Control Mode
Basic Structure:
In the figure above, the speed command processing is used to select the command
source of speed control according to chapter 6.3.1, including proportional gain (P1-40)
and S-curve filter smoothing strategy of speed control. The speed control block diagram
is used to manage the gain parameters of the servo drive and calculate the current input
provided to motor instantaneously. The resonance suppression block diagram is used to
suppress the resonance of mechanical system.
The function and structure of speed command processing is shown as the figure below:
Revision June 2010
6-11
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
SPD0,SPD1 signal of CN1
Internal
parameter
(Command source:
Internal parameter)
(Command source:
External analog signal)
P1-09
~P1-11
A/D
Proportion
Gain
P1-40
S-curve filter
P1-34,
P1-35,
P1-36
Analog command
filter
P1-34,
P1-35,
P1-36
Command
selection
P1-01
Low-pass
filter
P1-06
Analog signal
The command source is selected according to the state of SPD0, SPD1 and parameter P101 (S or Sz). Whenever the command signal needs to be more smoothly, we recommend
the users to use S-curve and low-pass filter.
6.3.3 Smoothing Strategy of Speed Control Mode
S-curve Filter
The S-curve filter is a speed smoothing command which provides 3 steps accel / decel Scurve to smooth the speed command change of the motor during acceleration and
deceleration. Using S-curve filter can let the servo motor run more smoothly in response
to a sudden speed command change. Since the speed and acceleration curve are both
continuous, in order to avoid the mechanical resonance and noise may occur due to a
sudden speed command (differentiation of acceleration), using S-curve filter not only can
improve the performance when servo motor accelerate or decelerate but also can make
the motor run more smoothly. S-curve filter parameters include P1-34 Acceleration Time
(TACC), P1-35 Deceleration Time (TDEC) and Accel /Decel S-curve (TSL), and the users can
use these three parameters to improve the motor performance during acceleration,
deceleration and operation. ASDA-B2 series servo drives also support the time calculation
of completing speed command. T (ms) is the operation (running) time. S (r/min) is
absolute speed command, i.e. the absolute value (the result) after starting speed
subtracts the final speed.
6-12
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
Relevant parameters:
P1 - 34
TACC
Acceleration Time
Communication Addr.:
00144H, 0145H
Default: 200
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: S
Section 6.3.3
Unit: ms
Range: 1 ~ 20000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to
its rated motor speed. The functions of parameters P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 are
each individual. When P1-36 is set to 0 (Disabled), the settings of P1-34, P1-35 are
still effective. It indicates that the parameters P1-34 and P1-35 will not become
disabled even when P1-36 is disabled.
NOTE
1. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is set to 0, the acceleration and deceleration function will be disabled.
2. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-34 is limited to 20000 automatically.
Revision June 2010
6-13
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
P1 - 35
TDEC
Deceleration Time
Communication Addr.:
0146H, 0147H
Default: 200
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: P/S
P1-34, P1-36, Section 6.3.3
Unit: ms
Range: 1 ~ 20000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the deceleration time to decelerate from its
rated rotation speed to 0. The functions of parameters P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 are
each individual. When P1-36 is set to 0 (Disabled), the settings of P1-34, P1-35 are
still effective. It indicates that the parameters P1-34 and P1-35 will not become
disabled even when P1-36 is disabled.
NOTE
1. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is set to 0, the acceleration and deceleration function will be disabled.
2. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-34 is limited to 20000 automatically.
P1 - 36
TSL
Accel /Decel S-curve
Communication Addr.:
0148H, 0149H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control mode: S
Section 6.3.3
Unit: ms
Range: 0 ~ 10000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to make the motor run more smoothly when startup and
windup. Using this parameter can improve the motor running stability.
TSL: P1-36, Accel /Decel S-curve
TACC: P1-34, Acceleration time
TDEC: P1-35, Deceleration time
6-14
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
Total acceleration time = TACC + TSL
Total deceleration time = TDEC + TSL
The functions of parameters P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 are each individual. When P136 is set to 0 (Disabled), the settings of P1-34, P1-35 are still effective. It indicates
that the parameters P1-34 and P1-35 will not become disabled even when P1-36 is
disabled.
NOTE
1. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is set to 0, the acceleration and deceleration function will be disabled.
2. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is limited to 10000 automatically.
Analog Speed Command S-curve Filter
ASDA-B2 series servo drives also provide Analog Speed Command S-curve Filter for the
smoothing in response to a sudden analog input signal.
Speed (rpm)
Analog speed command
Motor Torque
3000
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Time (sec)
-3000
The analog speed command S-curve filter is for the smoothing of analog input signal and
its function is the same as the S-curve filter. The speed and acceleration curve of analog
speed command S-curve filter are both continuous. The above figure shows the curve of
analog speed command S-curve filter and the users can see the ramp of speed command
is different during acceleration and deceleration. Also, the users can see the difference of
input command tracking and can adjust time setting by using parameter P1-34, P1-35, P136 to improve the actual motor performance according to actual condition.
Analog Speed Command Low-pass Filter
Analog Speed Command Low-pass Filter is used to eliminate high frequency response and
electrical interference from an analog speed command and it is also with smoothing
function.
Revision June 2010
6-15
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
Relevant parameters:
P1 - 06
Accel / Decel Smooth Constant of
Analog Speed Command (Low-pass
Filter)
SFLT
Communication Addr.:
010CH, 010DH
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: S
Section 6.3.3
Unit: ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
NOTE
1) If the setting value of parameter P1-06 is set to 0, it indicates the function of this
parameter is disabled and the command is just By-Pass.
Target Speed
SFLT
6.3.4 Analog Speed Input Scaling
The analog voltage between V_REF and GND determines the motor speed command.
Using with parameter P1-40 (Max. Analog Speed Command) can adjust the speed control
ramp and its range.
5000rpm
The speed control ramp is
determined by parameter P1-40
3000rpm
-10
-5
5
10
Analog Input Voltage (V)
-3000rpm
-5000rpm
6-16
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
Relevant parameters:
P1 - 40▲ VCM
Communication Addr.:
0150H, 0151H
Max. Analog Speed Command / Limit
Default: rated speed
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: S/T
Section 6.3.4
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 10000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
In Speed mode, this parameter is used to set the speed at the maximum input
voltage (10V) of the analog speed command.
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set the speed at the maximum input
voltage (10V) of the analog speed limit.
For example, in speed mode, if P1-40 is set to 3000 and the input voltage is 10V, it
indicates that the speed command is 3000r/min. If P1-40 is set to 3000, but the
input voltage is changed to 5V, then the speed command is changed to 1500r/min.
Speed command / limit = Input voltage x setting/10
6.3.5 Timing Chart of Speed Control Mode
S4 (P1-11)
Internal speed
command
S3 (P1-10)
S2 (P1-09)
External analog
voltage or zero (0)
External I/O signal
S1
SPD0
OFF
SPD1
OFF
SON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
NOTE
1) OFF indicates normally open and ON indicates normally closed.
2) When speed control mode is Sz, the speed command S1=0; when speed control mode is S,
the speed command S1 is external analog voltage input (Please refer to P1-01).
3) After Servo ON, the users can select command according to the state of SPD0~1.
Revision June 2010
6-17
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.3.6 Speed Loop Gain Adjustment
The function and structure of speed control mode is shown as the figure below:
There are two turning modes of gain adjustment: Manual and Auto modes. The gain of
ASDA-B2 series servo drives can be adjusted by using any one of three tuning modes.
„
Manual Mode: User-defined loop gain adjustment. When using this mode, all auto
and auxiliary function will be disabled.
„
Auto Mode: Continuous adjustment of loop gains according to measured inertia,
with ten levels of system bandwidth. The parameter set by user is default value.
The mode of gain adjustment can be selected by parameter P2-32:
P2 - 32▲ AUT2
Tuning Mode Selection
Communication Addr.:
0240H, 0241H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 5.6, Section 6.3.6
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 2
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: HEX
Settings:
0: Manual mode
1: AutoMode (PI) [Continuous adjustment]
2: Semi-Auto Mode [Non-continuous adjustment]
6-18
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
Explanation of manual mode:
1. When P2-32 is set to mode#0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06,
P2-07, P2-25 and P2-26 can be user-defined. When switching mode #1 or #2 to
#0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06, P2-07, P2-25 and P2-26 will
change to the value that measured in #1 auto-tuning mode or #2 semi-auto
tuning mode.
Explanation of auto-tuning mode:
The servo drive will continuously estimate the system inertia, save the measured
load inertia value automatically and memorized in P1-37 every 30 minutes by
referring to the frequency response settings of P2-31.
1. When switching mode #1 or #2 to #0, the servo drive will continuously estimate
the system inertia, save the measured load inertia value automatically and
memorized in P1-37. Then, set the corresponding parameters according to this
measured load inertia value.
2. When switching mode#0 or #1 to #2, enter the appropriate load inertia value in
P1-37.
3. When switching mode#1 to #0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-04 and P2-06 will
change to the value that measured in #1 auto-tuning mode.
Explanation of semi-auto tuning mode:
1. After the system inertia becomes stable (The display of P2-33 will show 1), it
will stop estimating the system inertia, save the measured load inertia value
automatically, and memorized in P1-37. However, when P2-32 is set to mode#1
or #2, the servo drive will continuously perform the adjustment for a period of
time.
2. When the value of the system inertia becomes over high, the display of P2-33
will show 0 and the servo drive will start to adjust the load inertia value
continuously.
Manual Mode
When Tuning Mode Settings of P2-32 is set to 0, the users can define the proportional
speed loop gain (P2-04), speed integral gain (P2-06) feed forward gain (P2-07) and ratio of
load inertia to servo motor Inertia (1-37). Please refer to the following description:
„
Proportional gain: Adjust this gain can increase the position loop responsiveness.
„
Integral gain: Adjust this gain can enhance the low-frequency stiffness of speed
loop and eliminate the steady error. Also, reduce the value of phase margin. Over
high integral gain will result in the unstable servo system.
„
Feed forward gain: Adjust this gain can decrease the phase delay error
Revision June 2010
6-19
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
Relevant parameters:
P2 - 04
KVP
Proportional Speed Loop Gain
Communication Addr.:
0208H, 0209H
Default: 500
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.6
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 8191
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the speed loop gain. When the value of proportional
speed loop gain is increased, it can expedite speed loop response. However, if the
setting value is over high, it may generate vibration or noise.
P2 - 06
KVI
Speed Integral Compensation
Communication Addr.:
020CH, 020DH
Default: 100
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.6
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 1023
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the integral time of speed loop. When the value of
speed integral compensation is increased, it can improve the speed response ability
and decrease the speed control deviation. However, if the setting value is over high,
it may generate vibration or noise.
P2 - 07
KVF
Speed Feed Forward Gain
Communication Addr.:
020EH, 020FH
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.6
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the feed forward gain when executing speed control
command.
6-20
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
When using speed smooth command, increase gain can improve speed track
deviation.
When not using speed smooth command, decrease gain can improve the resonance
condition of mechanical system.
In theory, stepping response can be used to explain proportional gain (KVP), integral gain
(KVI) and feed forward gain (KVF). Now we use frequency area and time area respectively
to explain the logic.
Frequency Domain
Revision June 2010
6-21
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
Time Domain
6-22
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
In general, the equipment, such as spectrum analyzer is needed and used to analyze
when using frequency domain method and the users also should have this kind of
analysis technology. However, when using time domain method, the users only need to
prepare an oscilloscope. Therefore, the general users usually use time domain method
with the analog DI/DO terminal provided by the servo drive to adjust what is called as PI
(Proportional and Integral) type controller. As for the performance of torque shaft load,
input command tracking and torque shaft load have the same responsiveness when using
frequency domain method and time domain method. The users can reduce the
responsiveness of input command tracking by using input command low-pass filter.
Auto Mode (Continuous adjustment))
This Auto Mode provides continuous adjustment of loop gains according to measured
inertia automatically. It is suitable when the load inertia is fixed or the load inertia change
is small and is not suitable for wide range of load inertia change. The period of
adjustment time is different depending on the acceleration and deceleration of servo
motor. To change the stiffness and responsiveness, please use parameter P2-31.
Motor Speed
W
Inertia Measurement
J
Revision June 2010
6-23
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.3.7 Resonance Suppression
The resonance of mechanical system may occur due to excessive system stiffness or
frequency response. However, this kind of resonance condition can be improved,
suppressed, even can be eliminated by using low-pass filter (parameter P2-25) and notch
filter (parameter P2-23, P2-24) without changing control parameter.
Relevant parameters:
P2 - 23
NCF1
Notch Filter 1 (Resonance Suppression)
Communication Addr.:
022EH, 022FH
Default: 1000
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.7
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set first resonance frequency of mechanical system. It
can be used to suppress the resonance of mechanical system and reduce the
vibration of mechanical system.
If P2-24 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
The parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are the first group of notch filter parameters and
the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are the second group of notch filter parameters.
P2 - 24
DPH1
Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 1
(Resonance Suppression)
Communication Addr.:
0230H, 0231H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.7
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings: 0: Disabled
This parameter is used to set magnitude of the resonance suppression that is set
by parameter P2-23. If P2-24 is set to 0, the parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are both
disabled.
The parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are the first group of notch filter parameters and
the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are the second group of notch filter parameters.
6-24
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
P2 - 43
NCF2
Notch Filter 2 (Resonance Suppression)
Communication Addr.:
0256H, 0257H
Default: 1000
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.7
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings: 0: Disabled
This parameter is used to set second resonance frequency of mechanical system. It
can be used to suppress the resonance of mechanical system and reduce the
vibration of mechanical system. If P2-43 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
The parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are the first group of notch filter parameters and
the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are the second group of notch filter parameters.
P2 - 44
DPH2
Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 2
(Resonance Suppression)
Communication Addr.:
0258H, 0259H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.7
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings: 0: Disabled
This parameter is used to set magnitude of the resonance suppression that is set
by parameter P2-43. If P2-44 is set to 0, the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are both
disabled.
P2 - 45
NCF3
Notch Filter 3 (Resonance Suppression)
Communication Addr.:
025AH, 025BH
Default: 1000
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.7
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set third resonance frequency of mechanical system. It
can be used to suppress the resonance of mechanical system and reduce the
Revision June 2010
6-25
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
vibration of mechanical system. If P2-45 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
P2 - 46
Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 3
(Resonance Suppression)
DPH3
Communication Addr.:
025CH, 025DH
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.7
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set magnitude of the resonance suppression that is set
by parameter P2-45. If P2-46 is set to 0, the parameters P2-45 and P2-46 are both
disabled.
P2 - 25
Low-pass Filter Time Constant
(Resonance Suppression)
NLP
Default: 2 (1kW and below models) or
5 (above 1kW models)
Communication Addr.:
0232H, 0233H
Related Section:
Section 6.3.7
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 0.1ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
This parameter is used to set low-pass filter time constant of resonance
suppression. If P2-25 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
6-26
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
There are two groups of notch filters provided by ASDA-A2 series. The first group of notch
filter is P2-43 and P2-44, and the second group of notch filter is P2-45 and P2-46. When there
is resonance, please set P2-47 to 1 or 2 (Auto mode), and then the servo drive will find
resonance frequency and suppress the resonance automatically. After suppressing the
resonance point, the system will memorize the notch filter frequency into P2-43 and P-45, and
memorize the notch filter attenuation rate into P2-44 and P2-46.
When P2-47 is set to 1, the resonance suppression will be enabled automatically. After the
mechanical system becomes stable (approximate 20 minutes), the setting value of P2-47 will
return to 0 (Disable auto resonance suppression function). When P2-47 is set to 2, the system
will find the resonance point continuously even after the mechanical system becomes stable.
When P2-47 is set to 1 or 2, if the resonance conditions can not be eliminated, we recommend
the users to check the settings of P2-44 and P2-46. If either of the setting value of P2-44 and
P2-46 is set to 32, please decrease the speed frequency response and estimate the resonance
point again. If the resonance conditions can not be eliminated when the setting values of P244 and P2-46 are both less than 32, please set P2-47 to 0 first, and increase the setting value
of P2-44 and P2-46 manually. If the resonance exists still after increasing the setting value of
P2-44 and P2-46, please decrease the value of speed frequency response again and then use
the resonance suppression function again.
When increasing the setting value of P2-44 and P2-46 manually, ensure to pay close attention
on the setting value of P2-44 and P2-46. If the value of P2-44 and P2-46 is greater than 0, it
indicates that the corresponding resonance frequency of P2-43 and P2-45 is found through
auto resonance suppression function. If the value of P2-44 and P2-46 is equal to 0, it indicates
that the value of P2-43 and P2-45 will be the default value 1000 and this is not the frequency
found by auto resonance suppression function. At this time, if the users increase the value of
notch filter attenuation rate which does not exist, the performance of the current mechanical
system may deteriorate.
Settings of P2-47
Current Value
Desired Value
0
1
0
2
1
0
1
1
1
2
2
0
2
1
Revision June 2010
Function
Clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and enable
auto resonance suppression function.
Clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and enable
auto resonance suppression function.
Save the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and disable
auto resonance suppression function.
Clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and enable
auto resonance suppression function.
Do not clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and
enable auto resonance suppression function
continuously.
Save the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and disable
auto resonance suppression function.
Clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and enable
auto resonance suppression function.
6-27
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
Settings of P2-47
Current Value
Desired Value
2
2
Function
Do not clear the setting value of P2-43 ~ P2-46 and
enable auto resonance suppression function
continuously.
Flowchart of auto resonance suppression operation:
6-28
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
Low-pass filter
Please use parameter P2-25. The figure below shows the resonant open-loop gain.
Gain
Frequency
When the low-pass filter (parameter P2-25) is adjusted from 0 to high value, the value of
Low-pass frequency (BW) will become smaller (see the figure below). The resonant
condition is improved and the frequency response and phase margin will also decrease.
Gain
0dB
BW
Frequency
Notch Filter
Usually, if the users know the resonance frequency, we recommend the users can
eliminate the resonance conditions directly by using notch filter (parameter P2-23, P2-24).
However, the range of frequency setting is from 50 to 1000Hz only and the range of
resonant attenuation is 0~32 dB only. Therefore, if the resonant frequency is out of this
range, we recommend the users to use low-pass filter (parameter P2-25) to improve
resonant condition.
Please refer to the following figures and explanation to know how to use notch filter and
low-pass filter to improve resonant condition.
Revision June 2010
6-29
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
Use Notch Filter to suppress resonance
Resonance
Point
Gain
Gain
Notch Filter
Resonance
conditions
is suppressed
0db
Low-pass
Frequency
Low-pass
Frequency
Attenuation
Rate P2-24
Frequency
Resonance
Frequency .
Gain
Resonance
Frequency .
Frequency
Resonance
Frequency
P2-23
Frequency
Use Low-pass Filter to suppress resonance
.
Resonance
Point
Gain
Low-pass
Frequency
Resonance
Frequency
Frequency
Gain
0db
Attenuation
Rate -3db
Low-pass Filter
Cut-off Frequency
of Low-pass Filter
= 10000 / P2-25
Hz
Frequency
Gain
Resonance
conditions
is suppressed
Low-pass
Frequency
Resonance
Frequency .
Frequency
When the low-pass filter (parameter P2-25) is adjusted from 0 to high value, the value of
Low-pass frequency will become smaller (see the figure on page 6-26). The resonant
condition is improved but the frequency response and phase margin will also decrease
and the system may become unstable. Therefore, if the users know the resonance
frequency, the users can eliminate the resonance conditions directly by using notch filter
(parameter P2-23, P2-24). Usually, if the resonant frequency can be recognized, we
recommend the users can directly use notch filter (parameter P2-23, P2-24) to eliminate
the resonance. However, if the resonant frequency will drift or drift out of the notch filter
range, we recommend the users not to use notch filter and use low-pass filter to improve
resonant conditions.
6-30
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.4 Torque Control Mode
The torque control mode (T or Tz) is usually used on the applications of torque control, such
as printing machine, spinning machine, twister, etc. Delta ASDA-B2 series servo drive
supports two kinds of command sources in torque control mode. One is external analog
signal and the other is internal parameter. The external analog signal is from external voltage
input and it can control the torque of servo motor. The internal parameters are from P1-12 to
P1-14 which are used to be the torque command in torque control mode.
6.4.1 Command Source of Torque Control Mode
Torque command Sources:
1) External analog signal: External analog voltage input, -10V to +10V
2) Internal parameter: P1-12 to P1-14
The command source selection is determined by the DI signal of CN1 connector.
Torque
Command
DI signal of
CN1
Command Source
Range
TCM1 TCM0
T
T1
0
0
Mode
External analog
signal
Tz
„
Content
T2
0
1
T3
1
0
T4
1
1
None
Internal parameter
Voltage between
T-REF-GND
+/- 10 V
Torque command is
0
0
P1-12
+/- 300 %
P1-13
+/- 300 %
P1-14
+/- 300 %
State of TCM0~1: 0: indicates OFF (Normally Open); 1: indicates ON (Normally
Closed)
„
When TCM0 and TCM1 are both 0 (OFF), if the control mode of operation is Tz,
then the command is 0. Therefore, if the users do not use analog voltage as torque
command, the users can choose Tz mode to operation torque control to avoid the
zero point drift problem of analog voltage. If the control mode of operation is T,
then the command is the analog voltage between T-REF and GND. The setting
range of the input voltage is from -10V to +10V and the corresponding torque is
adjustable (see parameter P1-41).
„
When at least one of TCM0 and TCM1 is not 0 (OFF), the torque command is
internal parameter. The command is valid (enabled) after either TCM0 or TCM1 is
changed.
The torque command that is described in this section not only can be taken as torque
command in torque control mode (T or Tz mode) but also can be the torque limit input
command in position mode (P mode) and speed control mode (S or Sz mode).
Revision June 2010
6-31
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.4.2 Structure of Torque Control Mode
Basic Structure:
The toque command processing is used to select the command source of torque control
according to chapter 6.4.1, including max. analog torque command (parameter P1-41)
and smoothing strategy of torque control mode. The current control block diagram is
used to manage the gain parameters of the servo drive and calculate the current input
provided to motor instantaneously. As the current control block diagram is too
complicated, setting the parameters of current control block diagram is not allowed. The
function and structure of torque command processing is shown as the figure below:
TCM0,TCM1 signal of CN1
Internal
parameter
(Command source:
Internal parameter)
P1-12
~1-14
(Command source:
External analog signal)
A/D
Proportion
Gain
P1-41
Command
selection
P1-01
Low-pass
filter
P1-07
Analog signal
The command source is selected according to the state of TCM0, TCM1 and parameter
P1-01 (T or Tz). Whenever the command signal needs to be more smoothly, we
recommend the users to use proportional gain (scalar) and low-pass filter to adjust torque.
6-32
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.4.3 Smoothing Strategy of Torque Control Mode
Relevant parameters:
P1 - 07
Smooth Constant of Analog Torque
Command (Low-pass Filter)
TFLT
Communication Addr.:
010EH, 010FH
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: T
Section 6.4.3
Unit: ms
Range: 0 ~ 1000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
NOTE
1) If the setting value of parameter P1-07 is set to 0, it indicates the function of this
parameter is disabled and the command is just By-Pass.
Target Speed
TFLT
6.4.4 Analog Torque Input Scaling
The analog voltage between T_REF and GND controls the motor torque command. Using
with parameter P1-41 can adjust the torque control ramp and its range.
300%
The torque control ramp is
determined by parameter P1-41
100%
Torque command
-10
-5
5
10
Analog Input Voltage (V)
-100%
-300%
Revision June 2010
6-33
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
Relevant parameters:
P1 - 41▲ TCM
Communication Addr.:
0152H, 0153H
Max. Analog Torque Command / Limit
Default: 100
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.4.4
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Settings:
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set the output torque at maximum
input voltage (10V) of analog torque command.
In Position and Speed mode, this parameter is used to set output torque at
maximum input voltage (10V) of analog torque limit
For example, in torque mode, if P1-41 is set to 100 and the input voltage is 10V, it
indicates that the torque command is 100% rated torque. If P1-41 is set to 100, but
the input voltage is changed to 5V, then the torque command is changed to 50%
rated torque.
Torque command / limit = Input voltage x setting/10 (%)
6.4.5 Timing Chart of Torque Control Mode
T4 (P1-14)
Internal speed
command
T3 (P1-13)
T2 (P1-12)
External analog
voltage or zero (0)
External I/O signal
T1
TCM0
OFF
TCM1
OFF
SON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
NOTE
1) OFF indicates normally open and ON indicates normally closed.
2) When torque control mode is Tz, the torque command T1=0; when torque control mode is
T, the speed command T1 is external analog voltage input (Please refer to P1-01).
3) After Servo ON, the users can select command according to the state of TCM0~1.
6-34
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.5 Control Modes Selection
Except signal control mode operation, ASDA-B2 series AC drive also provide PT-S, S-T, PT-T,
these three multiple modes for the users to select.
1) Speed / Position mode selection: PT-S
2) Speed / Torque mode selection: S-T
3) Torque / Position mode selection: PT-T
Mode
Name
Code
Description
PT-S
06
Either PT or S control mode can be selected via the Digital
Inputs (DI)
PT-T
07
Either PT or T control mode can be selected via the Digital
Inputs (DI)
S-T
0A
Either S or T control mode can be selected via the Digital
Inputs (DI)
Dual Mode
Sz and Tz mode selection is not provided. In order to avoid using too much DI inputs, we
recommend that the users can use external analog signal as input command in speed and
torque mode to reduce the use of DI inputs (SPD0~1 or TCM0~1).
Please refer to table 3.B and table 3.C in section 3.3.2 to see the default pin number of DI/DO
signal.
6.5.1 Speed / Position Control Mode Selection
PT-S Mode:
The command source of PT-S mode is from external input pulse. The speed command can
be the external analog voltage or internal parameters (P1-09 to P1-11). The speed and
position mode switching is controlled by the S-P signal. The timing chart of speed /
position control mode selection is shown as the figure below:
Revision June 2010
6-35
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.5.2 Speed / Torque Control Mode Selection
S-T Mode:
The speed command can be the external analog voltage or internal parameters (P1-09 to
P1-11) and SPD0~1 is used to select speed command. The same as speed command, the
torque command can be the external analog voltage or internal parameters (P1-12 to P114) and TCM0~1 is used to select torque command. The speed and torque mode
switching is controlled by the S-T signal.
The timing chart of speed / torque control mode selection is shown as the figure below:
In torque mode (when S-T is ON), torque command is selected by TCM0~1. When
switching to the speed mode (when S-T is OFF), the speed command is selected by
SPD0~1, and then the motor will immediately rotate following the command. After S-T is
ON again, it will immediately return to torque mode.
6.5.3 Torque / Position Control Mode Selection
PT-T Mode:
The command source of PT-T mode is from external input pulse. The torque command
can be the external input pulse or internal parameters (P1-12 to P1-14). The torque and
position mode switching is controlled by T-P signal.
The timing chart of speed / position control mode selection is shown as the figure below:
6-36
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.6 Others
6.6.1 Speed Limit
The max. servo motor speed can be limited by using parameter P1-55 no matter in
position, speed or torque control mode.
The command source of speed limit command is the same as speed command. It can be
the external analog voltage but also can be internal parameters (P1-09 to P1-11). For
more information of speed command source, please refer to chapter 6.3.1.
The speed limit only can be used in torque mode (T mode) to limit the servo motor speed.
When the torque command is the external analog voltage, there should be surplus DI
signal that can be treated as SPD0~1 and be used to select speed limit command (internal
parameter). If there is not enough DI signal, the external voltage input can be used as
speed limit command. When the Disable / Enable Speed Limit Function Settings in
parameter P1-02 is set to 1, the speed limit function is activated.
The timing chart of speed limit is shown as the figure below:
Disable / Enable Speed Limit Function
Settings in parameter P1-02 is set to 0
SPD0~1 INVALID
Disable / Enable Speed Limit Function
Settings in parameter P1-02 is set to 1
SPD0~1 VALID
Command Source Selection of Speed Limit
6.6.2 Torque Limit
The command source of torque limit command is the same as torque command. It can be
the external analog voltage but also can be internal parameters (P1-12 to P1-14). For
more information of torque command source, please refer to chapter 6.4.1.
The torque limit only can be used in position mode (PT mode) and speed mode (S mode)
to limit the output torque of servo motor. When the position command is the external
pulse and speed command is the external analog voltage, there should be surplus DI
signal that can be treated as TCM0~1 used to select torque limit command (internal
parameter). If there is not enough DI signal, the external voltage input can be used as
torque limit command. When the Disable / Enable Torque Limit Function Settings in
parameter P1-02 is set to 1, the torque limit function is activated.
The timing chart of torque limit is shown as the figure below:
Disable / Enable Torque Limit Function
Settings in parameter P1-02 is set to 0
TCM0~1 INVALID
Disable / Enable Torque Limit Function
Settings in parameter P1-02 is set to 1
TCM0~1 VALID
Command Source Selection of Torque Limit
Revision June 2010
6-37
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
6.6.3 Analog Monitor
User can use analog monitor to observe the required analog voltage signals. ASDA-B2
series provide two analog channels, they are PIN No. 1 and 3 of CN5 connector. The
parameters relative to analog monitor are shown below.
Relevant parameters:
P0 - 03
MON
Analog Monitor Output
Communication Addr.:
0006H, 0007H
Default: 01
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: 00 ~ 77
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: HEX
Settings:
A: CH1
B: CH2
not used
AB: (A: CH1; B: CH2)
0: Motor speed (+/-8 V/maximum rotation speed)
1: Motor torque (+/-8 V/maximum torque)
2: Pulse command frequency (+8 Volts /4.5Mpps)
3: Speed command (+/-8 Volts /maximum speed command)
4: Torque command (+/-8 Volts /maximum torque command)
5: V_BUS voltage (+/-8 Volts /450V)
6: Reserve
7: Reserve
Note: For the setting of analog output voltage proportion, refer to the P1-04 and
P1-05
Example: P0-03 = 01(CH1 is speed analog output)
Motor rotation speed = (Max. rotation speed × V1/8) × P1-04/100, when the output
voltage value of CH1 is V1.
6-38
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
P1 - 03
AOUT
Communication Addr.:
0106H, 0107H
Pulse Output Polarity Setting
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 3.3.3
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 3
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: HEX
Settings:
A
B
not used
Monitor analog output polarity
• A=0: MON1(+), MON2(+)
• A=1: MON1(+), MON2(-)
• A=2: MON1(-), MON2(+)
• A=3: MON1(-), MON2(-)
Pulse output polarity
• B=0: Forward output
• B=1: Reverse output
P1 - 04
MON1
Analog Monitor Output Proportion 1(CH1)
Communication Addr.:
0108H, 0109H
Default: 100
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.4.4
Unit: % (full scale)
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
P1 - 05
MON2
Analog Monitor Output Proportion 2(CH2)
Communication Addr.:
0108H, 0109H
Default: 100
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.4.4
Unit: % (full scale)
Range: 0~100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
Revision June 2010
6-39
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
P4 - 20
DOF1
Analog Monitor Output Drift Adjustment
(CH1)
Communication Addr.:
0428H, 0429H
Default: Factory setting
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.4.4
Unit: mV
Range: -800~800
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
This parameter cannot be reset.
P4 - 21
DOF2
Analog Monitor Output Drift Adjustment
(CH2)
Communication Addr.:
042AH, 042BH
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.4.4
Unit: mV
Range: -800~800
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: DEC
This parameter cannot be reset.
For example, when the users want to observe the analog voltage signal of channel 1, if
the monitor output setting range is 8V per 325Kpps, then it is needed to change the
setting value of parameter P1-04 (Analog Monitor Output Proportion 1) to 50
(=325Kpps/Max. input frequency). Other related parameters setting include parameter P003 (A=3) and P1-03 (A=0~3, output polarity setting). In general, when output voltage
value of Ch1 is V1, the pulse command frequency is equal to (Max. input frequency ×
V1/8) × P1-04/100.
Because there is an offset value of analog monitor output voltage, the zero voltage level
of analog monitor output does not match to the zero point of setting value. We
recommend the users can use Analog Monitor Output Drift Adjustment, DOF1 (parameter
P4-20) and DOF2 (parameter P4-21) to improve this condition. The maximum output
voltage range of analog monitor output is ±8V. If the output voltage exceed its limit, it is
still limited within the range of ±8V. The revolution provided by ASDA-B2 series is 10bit,
approximated to 13mv/LSB.
6-40
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
8V
DOF
-8V
6.6.4 Electromagnetic Brake
When the servo drive is operating, if the digital output BRKR is set to Off, it indicates the
electromagnetic brake is disabled and motor is stop running and locked. If the digital
output BRKR is set to ON, it indicates electromagnetic brake is enabled and motor can run
freely.
There are two parameters that affect the electromagnetic brake. One is parameter P1-42
(MBT1) and the other is parameter P1-43 (MBT2). The users can use these two parameters
to set the On and Off delay time of electromagnetic brake. The electromagnetic brake is
usually used in perpendicular axis (Z-axis) direction to reduce the large energy generated
from servo motor. Using electromagnetic brake can avoid the load may slip since there is
no motor holding torque when power is off. Without using electromagnetic brake may
reduce the life of servo motor. To avoid malfunction, the electromagnetic brake should be
activated after servo system is off (Servo Off).
If the users desire to control electromagnetic brake via external controller, not by the
servo drive, the users must execute the function of electromagnetic brake during the
period of time when servo motor is braking. The braking strength of motor and
electromagnetic brake must be in the same direction when servo motor is braking. Then,
the servo drive will operate normally. However, the servo drive may generate larger
current during acceleration or at constant speed and it may the cause of overload (servo
fault).
Revision June 2010
6-41
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
Timing chart for using servo motor with electromagnetic brake:
ON
SON
(DI Input)
OFF
OFF
ON
BRKR
(DO Output)
OFF
OFF
MBT1(P1-42)
MBT2(P1-43)
ZSPD(P1-38)
Motor Speed
BRKR output timing explanation:
1. When SERVO OFF (when DI SON is not activated), the BRKR output goes Off
(electromagnetic brake is locked) after the delay time set by P1-43 is reached and
the motor speed is still higher than the setting value of P1-38.
2. When SERVO OFF (when DI SON is not activated), the BRKR output goes Off
(electromagnetic brake is locked) if the delay time set by P1-43 is not reached and
the motor speed is still lower than the setting value of P1-38.
Electromagnetic Brake Wiring Diagram
NOTE
1)
Please refer to Chapter 3 Connections and Wiring for more wiring information.
2)
The BRKR signal is used to control the brake operation. The VDD DC24V power supply
of the servo drive can be used to power the relay coil (Relay). When BRKR signal is ON,
the motor brake will be activated.
6-42
3)
Please note that the coil of brake has no polarity.
4)
The power supply for brake is DC24V. Never use it for VDD, the +24V source voltage.
Revision June 2010
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
The timing charts of control circuit power and main circuit power:
L1, L2
Control Circuit
Power
1 sec
5V
Control Circuit
Power
> 0msec
R, S, T
Main Circuit
Power
800ms
BUS Voltage
READY
2 sec
SERVO
READY
SERVO ON
(DI Input)
1 msec (min)+ Response Filter Time of Digital Input ( P2-09)
SERVO ON
(DO Output)
Position \ Speed \
Torque Command
Input
Revision June 2010
Input available
6-43
Chapter 6 Control Modes of Operation
This page intentionally left blank
6-44
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7
7.1
Servo Parameters
Definition
There are following five groups for drive parameters:
Group 0: Monitor parameters
(example: P0-xx)
Group 1: Basic parameters
(example: P1-xx)
Group 2: Extension parameters
(example: P2-xx)
Group 3: Communication parameters
(example: P3-xx)
Group 4: Diagnosis parameters
(example: P4-xx)
Abbreviation of control modes:
PT: Position control mode (command from external signal)
S
:
Speed control mode
T
:
Torque control mode
Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)
(★)
Read-only register, such as P0-00, P0-01, P4-00.
(▲)
Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled), such as P1-00,
P1-46 and P2-33.
(z)
Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off
and on), such as P1-01 and P3-00.
(„)
Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off, such as P2-31 and P3-06.
Revision June 2010
7-1
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
7.2
Parameters Summary
Monitor and General Use
Parameter
Name
P0-00★
VER
Function
Firmware Version
Default
Unit
Factory
Setting
N/A
Control Mode
PT
S
T
Related
Section
O
O
O
-
N/A
N/A
O
O
O
11.1
11.2
11.3
Drive Status (Front Panel
Display)
00
N/A
O
O
O
7.2
MON
Analog Monitor Output
01
N/A
O
O
O
4.3.5
P0-08★
TSON
Servo Startup Time
0
Hour
P0-09★
CM1
Status Monitor 1
N/A
N/A
O
O
O
4.3.5
P0-10★
CM2
Status Monitor 2
N/A
N/A
O
O
O
4.3.5
P0-11★
CM3
Status Monitor 3
N/A
N/A
O
O
O
4.3.5
P0-12★
CM4
Status Monitor 4
N/A
N/A
O
O
O
4.3.5
P0-13★
CM5
Status Monitor 5
N/A
N/A
O
O
O
4.3.5
P0-17
CM1A
Status Monitor Selection 1
0
N/A
-
P0-18
CM2A
Status Monitor Selection 2
0
N/A
-
P0-19
CM3A
Status Monitor Selection 3
0
N/A
-
P0-20
CM4A
Status Monitor Selection 4
0
N/A
-
P0-21
CM5A
Status Monitor Selection 5
0
N/A
-
P0-46★
SVSTS
Servo Output Status Display
0
N/A
O
O
O
-
P1-04
MON1
Analog Monitor Output
Proportion 1 (CH1)
100
%(full
scale)
O
O
O
6.4.4
P1-05
MON2
Analog Monitor Output
Proportion 2 (CH2)
100
%(full
scale)
O
O
O
6.4.4
P0-01„
ALE
Drive Fault Code
P0-02
STS
P0-03
-
Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)
(★)
(▲)
(z)
(„)
7-2
Read-only register.
Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Smooth Filter and Resonance Suppression
Parameter
Name
P1-06
SFLT
P1-07
TFLT
P1-08
PFLT
P1-34
TACC
P1-35
TDEC
P1-36
TSL
P1-59
MFLT
P1-62
FRCL
P1-63
FRCT
P1-68
PFLT2
P2-23
NCF1
P2-24
DPH1
P2-43
NCF2
P2-44
DPH2
P2-45
NCF3
P2-46
DPH3
P2-47
ANCF
P2-48
ANCL
P2-25
NLP
P2-49
SJIT
Function
Control Mode
Related
Section
Default
Unit
0
ms
0
ms
0
10ms
Acceleration Time
200
ms
O
6.3.3
Deceleration Time
200
ms
O
6.3.3
0
ms
O
6.3.3
0
0.1ms
O
-
0
%
O
O
O
-
0
ms
O
O
O
-
0
ms
O
1000
Hz
O
O
O
6.3.7
0
dB
O
O
O
6.3.7
1000
Hz
O
O
O
6.3.7
0
dB
O
O
O
6.3.7
1000
Hz
O
O
O
6.3.7
0
dB
O
O
O
6.3.7
1
N/A
O
O
O
-
100
N/A
O
O
O
-
2 or 5
0.1ms
O
O
O
6.3.7
0
sec
O
O
O
-
Accel / Decel Smooth Constant
of Analog Speed Command
(Low-pass Filter)
Smooth Constant of Analog
Torque Command (Low-pass
Filter)
Smooth Constant of Position
Command (Low-pass Filter)
Accel /Decel S-curve
Analog Speed Linear Filter
(Moving Filter)
Friction Compensation
Percentage
Friction Compensation Smooth
Constant
Position Command Moving
Filter
Notch Filter 1 (Resonance
Suppression)
Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 1
(Resonance Suppression)
Notch Filter 2 (Resonance
Suppression)
Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 2
(Resonance Suppression)
Notch Filter 3 (Resonance
Suppression)
Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 3
(Resonance Suppression)
Auto Resonance Suppression
Mode Selection
Auto Resonance Suppression
Detection Level
Low-pass Filter Time Constant
(Resonance Suppression)
Speed Detection Filter and Jitter
Suppression
PT
S
T
O
6.3.3
O
O
6.4.3
6.2.6
-
Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)
(★)
(▲)
(z)
(„)
Read-only register.
Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.
Revision June 2010
7-3
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Gain and Switch
Control Mode
Related
Section
Parameter
Name
Function
Default
Unit
P2-00
KPP
Proportional Position Loop Gain
35
rad/s
O
6.2.8
P2-01
PPR
Position Loop Gain Switching
Rate
100
%
O
6.2.8
P2-02
PFG
Position Feed Forward Gain
50
%
O
6.2.8
P2-03
PFF
Smooth Constant of Position
Feed Forward Gain
5
ms
O
-
P2-04
KVP
Proportional Speed Loop Gain
500
rad/s
O
O
O
6.3.6
P2-05
SPR
Speed Loop Gain Switching Rate
100
%
O
O
O
-
P2-06
KVI
Speed Integral Compensation
100
rad/s
O
O
O
6.3.6
P2-07
KVF
Speed Feed Forward Gain
0
%
O
O
O
6.3.6
P2-26
DST
External Anti-Interference Gain
0
0.001
O
O
O
-
P2-27
GCC
Gain Switching Control
Selection
0
N/A
O
O
O
-
P2-28
GUT
Gain Switching Time Constant
10
10ms
O
O
O
-
P2-29
GPE
Gain Switching Condition
pulse
1280000 Kpps
r/min
O
O
O
-
P2-31
AUT1
Speed Frequency Response
Level in Auto and Semi-Auto
Mode
P2-32▲
AUT2
Tuning Mode Selection
PT
S
T
80
Hz
O
O
O
0
N/A
O
O
O
5.6
6.3.6
5.6
6.3.6
Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)
(★)
(▲)
(z)
(„)
7-4
Read-only register.
Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Position Control
PT
S
T
pulse
r/min
N-M
O
O
O
6.1
0
N/A
O
O
O
6.6
100
%
O
O
O
6.4.1
Encoder Output Pulse Number
2500
pulse
O
O
O
-
rated
r/min
O
O
O
-
0
N/A
O
-
Name
P1-01z
CTL
Control Mode
Direction
P1-02▲
PSTL
Speed and Torque Limit
P1-12 ~
P1-14
Control Mode
Related
Section
Parameter
Function
and
Output
TQ1 ~ 3 1st ~ 3rd Torque Limit
P1-46▲
GR3
P1-55
MSPD
Maximum Speed Limit
P2-50
DCLR
Pulse Deviation Clear Mode
Default
Unit
0
External Pulse Control Command (PT mode)
P1-00▲
PTT
External Pulse Input Type
0x2
N/A
O
6.2.1
P1-44▲
GR1
Electronic Gear Ratio (1st
Numerator) (N1)
1
pulse
O
6.2.5
P1-45▲
GR2
Electronic Gear Ratio
(Denominator) (M)
1
pulse
O
6.3.6
P2-60▲
GR4
Electronic Gear Ratio (2nd
Numerator) (N2)
1
pulse
O
-
P2-61▲
GR5
Electronic Gear Ratio (3rd
Numerator) (N3)
1
pulse
O
-
P2-62▲
GR6
Electronic Gear Ratio (4th
Numerator) (N4)
1
pulse
O
-
Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)
(★)
(▲)
(z)
(„)
Read-only register.
Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.
Revision June 2010
7-5
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Speed Control
Parameter
Name
P1-01z
CTL
P1-02▲
Function
PT
S
T
pulse
r/min
N-M
O
O
O
6.1
0
N/A
O
O
O
6.6
1
pulse
O
O
O
-
rated
r/min
O
O
O
-
1000
~
3000
0.1
r/min
O
O
6.3.1
100
%
O
O
6.6.2
rated
r/min
O
O
6.3.4
Unit
Control Mode and Output
Direction
0
PSTL
Speed and Torque Limit
P1-46▲
GR3
Encoder Output Pulse Number
P1-55
MSPD
Maximum Speed Limit
P1-09 ~
P1-11
SP1 ~ 3 1st ~ 3rd Speed Command
P1-12 ~
P1-14
TQ1 ~ 3 1st ~ 3rd Torque Limit
Control Mode
Related
Section
Default
O
P1-40▲
VCM
Max. Analog Speed Command or
Limit
P1-41▲
TCM
Max. Analog Torque Command
or Limit
100
%
O
O
O
-
P1-76
AMSPD
Max. Rotation Speed of Encoder
Output
5500
r/min
O
O
O
-
Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)
(★)
(▲)
(z)
(„)
7-6
Read-only register.
Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Torque Control
Parameter
Name
P1-01z
CTL
P1-02▲
Control Mode
PT
S
T
Related
Section
pulse
r/min
N-M
O
O
O
6.1
0
N/A
O
O
O
6.6
1
pulse
O
O
O
-
Maximum Speed Limit
rated
r/min
O
O
O
-
1000
~
3000
r/min
O
O
6.6.1
100
%
O
O
6.4.1
rated
r/min
O
O
-
100
%
O
O
6.4.4
Function
Default
Unit
Control Mode and Output
Direction
0
PSTL
Speed and Torque Limit
P1-46▲
GR3
Encoder Output Pulse Number
P1-55
MSPD
P1-09
~
P1-11
SP1~3
1st ~ 3rd Speed Limit
P1-12
~
P1-14
TQ1~3
1st ~ 3rd Torque Command
P1-40▲
VCM
Max. Analog Speed Command or
Limit
P1-41▲
TCM
Max. Analog Torque Command
or Limit
O
O
Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)
(★)
(▲)
(z)
(„)
Read-only register.
Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.
Revision June 2010
7-7
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Digital I/O and Relative Input Output Setting
Control Mode
PT
S
T
Related
Section
2ms
O
O
O
-
101
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.A
Digital Input Terminal 2 (DI2)
104
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.A
DI3
Digital Input Terminal 3 (DI3)
116
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.A
P2-13
DI4
Digital Input Terminal 4 (DI4)
117
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.A
P2-14
DI5
Digital Input Terminal 5 (DI5)
102
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.A
P2-15
DI6
Digital Input Terminal 6 (DI6)
22
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.A
P2-16
DI7
Digital Input Terminal 7 (DI7)
23
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.A
P2-17
DI8
Digital Input Terminal 8 (DI8)
21
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.A
P2-36
DI9
External Digital Input Terminal 9
(DI9)
0
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.A
P2-18
DO1
Digital Output Terminal 1 (DO1)
101
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.B
P2-19
DO2
Digital Output Terminal 2 (DO2)
103
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.B
P2-20
DO3
Digital Output Terminal 3 (DO3)
109
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.B
P2-21
DO4
Digital Output Terminal 4 (DO4)
105
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.B
P2-22
DO5
Digital Output Terminal 5 (DO5)
7
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.B
P2-37
DO6
Digital Output Terminal 5 (DO5)
7
N/A
O
O
O
Table 7.B
P1-38
ZSPD
Zero Speed Range Setting
100
0.1
r/min
O
O
O
Table 7.B
P1-39
SSPD
Target Motor Speed
3000
r/min
O
O
O
Table 7.B
P1-42
MBT1
On Delay Time of
Electromagnetic Brake
0
ms
O
O
O
6.5.5
P1-43
MBT2
OFF Delay Time of
Electromagnetic Brake
0
ms
O
O
O
6.5.5
P1-47
SCPD
Speed Reached Output Range
10
r/min
P1-54
PER
Positioning Completed Width
12800
pulse
O
P1-56
OVW
Output Overload Warning Time
120
%
O
Parameter
Name
Function
Default
Unit
P2-09
DRT
Bounce Filter
2
P2-10
DI1
Digital Input Terminal 1 (DI1)
P2-11
DI2
P2-12
O
Table 7.B
Table 7.B
O
O
Table 7.B
Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)
(★)
(▲)
(z)
(„)
7-8
Read-only register.
Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Communication
Control Mode
PT
S
T
Related
Section
N/A
O
O
O
8.2
0x0203
bps
O
O
O
8.2
Communication Protocol
6
N/A
O
O
O
8.2
Transmission Fault Treatment
0
N/A
O
O
O
8.2
0
sec
O
O
O
8.2
0
N/A
O
O
O
8.2
0
N/A
O
O
O
8.2
0
1ms
O
O
O
8.2
0000
N/A
O
O
O
8.2
Parameter
Name
Function
Default
Unit
P3-00z
ADR
Communication Address Setting
0x7F
P3-01
BRT
Transmission Speed
P3-02
PTL
P3-03
FLT
P3-04
CWD
P3-05
CMM
P3-06„
SDI
P3-07
CDT
P3-08
MNS
Communication Time Out
Detection
Communication Selection
Digital Input Communication
Function
Communication Response Delay
Time
Monitor Mode
Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)
(★)
(▲)
(z)
(„)
Read-only register.
Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.
Revision June 2010
7-9
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Diagnosis
Control Mode
PT
S
T
Related
Section
N/A
O
O
O
4.4.1
0
N/A
O
O
O
4.4.1
Fault Record (N-2)
0
N/A
O
O
O
4.4.1
ASH4
Fault Record (N-3)
0
N/A
O
O
O
4.4.1
P4-04★
ASH5
Fault Record (N-4)
0
N/A
O
O
O
4.4.1
P4-05
JOG
JOG Operation
20
r/min
O
O
O
4.4.2
P4-06▲„
FOT
Force Output Contact Control
0
N/A
O
O
O
4.4.4
P4-07
ITST
Input Status
0
N/A
O
O
O
4.4.5
8.2
P4-08★
PKEY
Digital Keypad Input of Servo
Drive
N/A
N/A
O
O
O
-
P4-09★
MOT
Output Status
N/A
N/A
O
O
O
4.4.6
P4-10▲
CEN
Adjustment Function
0
N/A
O
O
O
-
P4-11
SOF1
N/A
O
O
O
-
P4-12
SOF2
N/A
O
O
O
-
P4-14
TOF2
N/A
O
O
O
-
P4-15
COF1
N/A
O
O
O
-
P4-16
COF2
N/A
O
O
O
-
P4-17
COF3
N/A
O
O
O
-
P4-18
COF4
N/A
O
O
O
-
P4-19
TIGB
P4-20
DOF1
P4-21
DOF2
P4-22
SAO
P4-23
TAO
Parameter
Name
P4-00★
ASH1
P4-01★
Function
Default
Unit
Fault Record (N)
0
ASH2
Fault Record (N-1)
P4-02★
ASH3
P4-03★
Analog Speed Input Drift
Adjustment 1
Analog Speed Input Drift
Adjustment 2
Analog Torque Drift Adjustment
2
Factory
Setting
Factory
Setting
Factory
Setting
Current Detector Drift
Adjustment (V1 phase)
Current Detector Drift
Adjustment (V2 phase)
Current Detector Drift
Adjustment (W1 phase)
Current Detector Drift
Adjustment (W2 phase)
Factory
Setting
Factory
Setting
Factory
Setting
Factory
Setting
IGBT NTC Calibration
Factory
Setting
N/A
O
O
O
-
0
mV
O
O
O
6.4.4
0
mV
O
O
O
6.4.4
Analog Speed Input Offset
0
mV
Analog Torque Input Offset
0
mV
Analog Monitor Output Drift
Adjustment (CH1)
Analog Monitor Output Drift
Adjustment (CH2)
O
O
-
Explanation of symbols (marked after parameter)
(★)
(▲)
(z)
(„)
7-10
Read-only register.
Parameter cannot be set when Servo On (when the servo drive is enabled).
Parameter is effective only after the servo drive is restarted (after switching power off and
on).
Parameter setting values are not retained when power is off.
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
7.3 Detailed Parameter Listings
Group 0: P0-xx Monitor Parameters
P0 - 00★ VER
Firmware Version
Default: Factory setting
Address: 0000H, 0001H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
P0 - 01■ ALE
Drive Fault Code
Default: N/A
Address: 0002H, 0003H
Related Section: Chapter 11
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 001 ~ 380
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: BCD
Settings:
This parameter shows the current servo drive fault if the servo drive is currently
faulted.
The fault code is hexadecimal data but displayed in BCD format (Binary coded
decimal).
Servo Drive Fault Codes:
001: Overcurrent
002: Overvoltage
003: Undervoltage (This fault code shows when main circuit voltage is below its
minimum specified value while Servo On, and it will not show while Servo Off.
This fault code can’t be cleared automatically after the voltage has returned
within its specification. Please refer to parameter P2-66.)
004: Motor error (The drive and motor are not correctly matched for size (power
rating).
005: Regeneration error
006: Overload
007: Overspeed
008: Abnormal pulse control command
009: Excessive deviation
010: Reserved
Revision June 2010
7-11
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
011: Encoder error (The wiring of the encoder is in error and this causes the
communication error between the servo drive and the encoder.)
012: Adjustment error
013: Emergency stop activated
014: Reverse limit switch error
015: Forward limit switch error
016: IGBT temperature error
017: Memory error
018: Encoder output error
019: Serial communication error
020: Serial communication time out
021: Reserved
022: Input power phase loss
023: Pre-overload warning
024: Encoder initial magnetic field error
025: Encoder internal error
026: Encoder data error
027: Encoder internal reset error
030: Motor protection error
031: U, V, W wiring error
099: DSP firmware upgrade
P0 - 02
STS
Drive Status (Front Panel Display)
Address: 0004H, 0005H
Default: 00
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.3.5, Section 7.2
Unit: N/A
Range:0~18
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter shows the servo drive status.
00: Motor feedback pulse number (after electronic gear ratio is set) [user unit]
01: Input pulse number of pulse command (after electronic gear ratio is set) [user
unit]
02: Position error counts between control command pulse and feedback pulse
[user unit]
03: Motor feedback pulse number (encoder unit, 1280000 pulse/rev) [pulse]
04: Input pulse number of pulse command (before electronic gear ratio is set)
[pulse]
7-12
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
05: Position error counts [pulse]
06: Input frequency of pulse command [Kpps]
07: Motor rotation speed [r/min]
08: Speed input command [Volt]
09: Speed input command [r/min]
10: Torque input command [Volt]
11: Torque input command [%]
12: Average load [%]
13: Peak load [%]
14: Main circuit voltage [Volt]
15: Ratio of load inertia to Motor inertia [0.1times]
16: IGBT temperature
17: Resonance frequency [Hz]
18: Absolute pulse number relative to encoder (use Z phase as home). The value of
Z phase home point is 0, and it can be the value from -5000 to +5000 pulses.
P0 - 03
MON
Analog Monitor Output
Address: 0006H, 0007H
Default: 01
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: 00 ~ 77
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter determines the functions of the analog monitor outputs.
XY: (X: CH1; Y: CH2)
0: Motor speed (+/-8V / maximum motor speed)
1: Motor torque (+/-8V / maximum torque)
2: Pulse command frequency (+8Volts / 4.5Mpps)
3: Speed command (+/-8Volts / maximum speed command)
4: Torque command (+/-8Volts / maximum torque command)
Revision June 2010
7-13
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
5: V_BUS voltage (+/-8Volts / 450V)
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
Please note: For the setting of analog output voltage proportion, refer to the P1-04
and P1-05.
Example:
P0-03 = 01(CH1 is speed analog output)
Motor speed = (Max. motor speed × V1/8) × P1-04/100, when the output voltage
value of CH1 is V1.
P0 - 04■ Reserved (Do Not Use)
P0 - 05■ Reserved (Do Not Use)
P0 - 06■ Reserved (Do Not Use)
P0 - 07■ Reserved (Do Not Use)
P0 - 08★ TSON
Servo Startup Time
Default: 0
Address: 0010H, 0011H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: Hour
Range: 0 ~ 65535
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
P0 - 09★ CM1
Status Monitor 1
Address: 0012H, 0013H
Default: N/A
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to provide the value of one of the status monitoring
functions found in P0-02. The value of P0-09 is determined by P0-17 (desired drive
status) through communication setting or the keypad. The drive status can be read
from the communication address of this parameter via communication port.
For example:
Set P0-17 to 3, then all consequent reads of P0-09 will return the motor feedback
7-14
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
pulse number in pulse.
When reading the drive status through Modbus communication, the system should
read two 16-bit data stored in the addresses of 0012H and 0013H to form a 32-bit
data.
(0013H : 0012H) = (high byte : low byte)
When reading the drive ststus through the keypad, if P0-02 is set to 23, VAR-1 will
quickly show for about two seconds and then the value of P0-09 will display on the
display.
P0 - 10★ CM2
Status Monitor 2
Address: 0014H, 0015H
Default: N/A
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to provide the value of one of the status monitoring
functions found in P0-02. The value of P0-10 is determined by P0-18 (desired drive
status) through communication setting or the keypad. The drive status can be read
from the communication address of this parameter via communication port.
When reading the drive status through the keypad, if P0-02 is set to 24, VAR-2 will
quickly show for about two seconds and then the value of P0-10 will display on the
display.
P0 -11★ CM3
Status Monitor 3
Address: 0016H, 0017H
Default: N/A
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to provide the value of one of the status monitoring
functions found in P0-02. The value of P0-11 is determined by P0-19 (desired drive
status) through communication setting or the keypad. The drive status can be read
from the communication address of this parameter via communication port.
When reading the drive status through the keypad, if P0-02 is set to 25, VAR-3 will
quickly show for about two seconds and then the value of P0-11 will display on the
display.
Revision June 2010
7-15
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P0 - 12★ CM4
Status Monitor 4
Address: 0018H, 0019H
Default: N/A
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to provide the value of one of the status monitoring
functions found in P0-02. The value of P0-12 is determined by P0-20 (desired drive
status) through communication setting or the keypad. The drive status can be read
from the communication address of this parameter via communication port.
When reading the drive status through the keypad, if P0-02 is set to 26, VAR-4 will
quickly show for about two seconds and then the value of P0-12 will display on the
display.
P0 - 13★ CM5
Status Monitor 5
Address: 001AH, 001BH
Default: N/A
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to provide the value of one of the status monitoring
functions found in P0-02. The value of P0-12 is determined by P0-20 (desired drive
status) through communication setting or the keypad. The drive status can be read
from the communication address of this parameter via communication port.
P0 - 14
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P0 - 15
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P0 - 16
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P0 - 17
CM1A
Status Monitor Selection 1
Default: 0
Address: 0022H, 0023H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 18
7-16
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the drive status found in P0-02. The selected
drive status will be displayed by P0-09.
For example:
Set P0-17 to 7, then all consequent reads of P0-09 will return the motor rotation
speed in r/min.
P0 - 18
CM2A
Status Monitor Selection 2
Default: 0
Address: 0024H, 0025H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 18
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the drive status found in P0-02.
P0 - 19
CM3A
Status Monitor Selection 3
Default: 0
Address: 0026H, 0027H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 18
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the drive status found in P0-02.
P0 - 20
CM4A
Status Monitor Selection 4
Default: 0
Address: 0028H, 0029H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 18
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the drive status found in P0-02.
Revision June 2010
7-17
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P0 - 21
CM5A
Status Monitor Selection 5
Default: 0
Address: 002AH, 002BH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 18
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the drive status found in P0-02.
P0 - 22
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P0 - 23
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P0 - 24
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P0 - 44
PCMN
Status Monitor Register (PC Software
Setting)
Address: 0058H, 0059H
Default: 0x0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: determined by the communication address of the designated parameter
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
The function of this parameter is the same as P0-09 (Please refer to P0-09). Please
note that this pamameter can be set through communication setting only.
P0 - 45■ PCMNA
Status Monitor Register Selection (PC
Software Setting)
Address: 005AH, 005BH
Default: 0x0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.3.5
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 127
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
The function of this parameter is the same as P0-17 (Please refer to P0-17). Please
note that this pamameter can be set through communication setting only.
7-18
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P0 - 46★ SVSTS
Servo Output Status Display
Default: 0
Address: 005CH, 005DH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x00 ~ 0xFF
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to display the digital output signal of the servo drive. The
servo output status display will show in hexadecimal format.
Bit0: SRDY (Servo ready)
Bit1: SON (Servo On)
Bit2: ZSPD (At Zero speed)
Bit3: TSPD (At Speed reached)
Bit4: TPOS (At Positioning completed)
Bit5: TQL (At Torque limit)
Bit6: ALRM (Servo alarm activated)
Bit7: BRKR (Electromagnetic brake control)
Bit9: OLW (Output overload warning)
Bit10: WARN (Servo warning activated. WARN is activated when the drive has
detected reverse limit error; forward limit error, emergency stop, serial
communication error, and undervoltage these fault conditions.)
Bit11: Reserved
Bit12: Reserved
Bit13: Reserved
Bit14: Reserved
Bit15: Reserved
The servo output status display can be monitored through communication also.
Revision June 2010
7-19
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Group 1: P1-xx
Basic Parameters
P1 - 00▲ PTT
External Pulse Input Type
Address: 0100H, 0101H
Default: 0x2
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Section 6.2.1
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 1132
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
A: Input pulse type
0: AB phase pulse (4x) (Quadrature Input)
1: Clockwise (CW) + Counterclockwise(CCW) pulse
2: Pulse + Direction
3: Other settings:
B: Input pulse filter
This setting is used to suppress or reduce the chatter caused by the noise, etc.
However, if the instant input pulse filter frequency is over high, the frequency that
exceeds the setting value will be regarded as noise and filtered.
7-20
B
Low Filter
Setting Value
High Filter
0
1.66Mpps
0
6.66Mpps
1
416Kpps
1
1.66Mpps
2
208Kpps
2
833Kpps
3
104Kpps
3
416Kpps
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
C: Input polarity
Logic
Pulse Type
Forward
Reverse
AB phase
pulse
0
Positive CW + CCW
Logic
pulse
Pulse +
Direction
AB phase
pulse
1
Negative CW + CCW
Logic
pulse
Pulse +
Direction
Pulse specification
High-speed
pulse
Low-speed
pulse
Max.
input
pulse
frequency
Line
receiver
Line
driver
Open
collector
T1
T2
T3
T4
T5
T6
4Mpps
62.5ns
125ns
250ns
200ns
125ns
125ns
500Kpps
0.5μs
1μs
2μs
2μs
1μs
1μs
200Kpps
1.25μs
2.5μs
5μs
5μs
2.5μs
2.5μs
Pulse specification
High-speed pulse
Low-speed pulse
Min. time width
Line
receiver
Line
driver
Open
collector
Max. input pulse
frequency
Voltage
specification
Forward
specification
4Mpps
5V
< 25mA
500Kpps
2.8V ~ 3.7V
< 25mA
200Kpps
24V (Max.)
< 25mA
D: Source of pulse command
Setting
value
0
1
Revision June 2010
Input pulse interface
Open collector for
low-speed pulse
Line driver for
high-speed pulse
Remark
CN1 Terminal Identification:
PULSE, SIGN
CN1 Terminal Identification:
PULSE_D, SIGN_D
7-21
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P0 - 01z CTL
Control Mode and Output Direction
Address: 0102H, 0103H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.1, Table 7.A
Unit: pulse (P mode), r/min (S mode), N-m (T mode)
Range: 00 ~ 110F
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
A: Control mode settings
Mode
PT
S
T
Sz
Tz
Single Mode
00
▲
01
Reserved
02
▲
03
▲
04
▲
05
▲
Multiple Mode
06
▲
07
▲
▲
▲
08
Reserved
09
Reserved
0A
▲
▲
Single Mode:
PT: Position control mode. The command is from external pulse or
analog voltage (external analog voltage will be available soon).
Execution of the command selection is via DI signal, PTAS.
S: Speed control mode. The command is from external signal or internal
signal. Execution of the command selection is via DI signals, SPD0
and SPD1.
T: Torque control mode. The command is from external signal or
internal signal. Execution of the command selection is via DI signals,
TCM0 and TCM1.
7-22
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Sz: Zero speed / internal speed command
Tz: Zero torque / internal torque command
Multiple Mode: Control of the mode selection is via DI signals. For
example, either PT or S control mode can be selected via
DI signals, S-P (see Table 7.A).
B: Torque output direction settings
Direction
0
1
Forward
Reverse
P0 - 02▲ PSTL
Speed and Torque Limit
Address: 0104H, 0105H
Default: 00
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.6, Table 7.A
Unit: N/A
Range: 00 ~ 11
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
A: Disable or Enable speed limit function
0: Disable speed limit function
1: Enable speed limit function (It is available in torque mode)
B: Disable or Enable torque limit function
0: Disable torque limit function
1: Enable torque limit function (It is available in position and speed mode)
Revision June 2010
7-23
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
This parameter is used to determine that the speed and torque limit functions are
enabled or disabled. If P1-02 is set to 11, it indicates that the speed and torque
limit functions are enabled always. The users can also use DI signals, SPDLM and
TRQLM to enable the speed and torque limit functions. Please note that DI signals,
SPD0, SPD1, TCM0, and TCM1 are used to select the command source of the speed
and torque limit.
P1 - 03
AOUT
Pulse Output Polarity Setting
Address: 0106H, 0107H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 3.3.3
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 13
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
A: Analog monitor outputs polarity
B: Position pulse outputs polarity
0: MON1(+), MON2(+)
0: Forward output
1: MON1(+), MON2(-)
1: Reverse output
2: MON1(-), MON2(+)
3: MON1(-), MON2(-)
P1 - 04
MON1
Analog Monitor Output Proportion 1
(CH1)
Default: 100
Address: 0108H, 0109H
Related Section: Section 6.4.4
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: % (full scale)
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
7-24
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P1 - 05
MON2
Analog Monitor Output Proportion 2
(CH2)
Address: 010AH, 010BH
Default: 100
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.4.4
Unit: % (full scale)
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
P1 - 06
SFLT
Accel / Decel Smooth Constant of Analog
Speed Command (Low-pass Filter)
Address: 010CH, 010DH
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: S
Section 6.3.3
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
P1 - 07
TFLT
Smooth Constant of Analog Torque
Command (Low-pass Filter)
Address: 010EH, 010FH
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: T
Section 6.4.3
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
P1 - 08
PFLT
Smooth Constant of Position Command
(Low-pass Filter)
Address: 0110H, 0111H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Section 6.2.6
Unit: 10msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Revision June 2010
7-25
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P1 - 09
SP1
1st Speed Command or Limit
Address: 0112H, 0113H
Default: 1000
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: S, T
Section 6.3.1
Unit: 0.1 r/min
Range: -50000 ~ +50000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
1st Speed Command
In Speed mode, this parameter is used to set speed 1 of internal speed command.
1st Speed Limit
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set speed limit 1 of internal speed
command.
P1 - 10
SP2
2nd Speed Command or Limit
Address: 0114H, 0115H
Default: 2000
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: S, T
Section 6.3.1
Unit: 0.1 r/min
Range: -50000 ~ +50000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
2nd Speed Command
In Speed mode, this parameter is used to set speed 2 of internal speed command.
2nd Speed Limit
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set speed limit 2 of internal speed
command.
P1 - 11
SP3
3rd Speed Command or Limit
Address: 0116H, 0117H
Default: 3000
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: S, T
Section 6.3.1
Unit: 0.1 r/min
Range: -50000 ~ +50000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
3rd Speed Command
In Speed mode, this parameter is used to set speed 3 of internal speed command.
7-26
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
3rd Speed Limit
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set speed limit 3 of internal speed
command.
P1 - 12
TQ1
1st Torque Command or Limit
Address: 0118H, 0119H
Default: 100
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: T, P&S
Section 6.4.1
Unit: %
Range: -300 ~ +300
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
1st Torque Command
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set torque 1 of internal torque
command.
1st Torque Limit
In Position and Speed mode, this parameter is used to set torque limit 1 of internal
torque command.
P1 - 13
TQ2
2nd Torque Command or Limit
Address: 011AH, 011BH
Default: 100
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: T, P&S
Section 6.4.1
Unit: %
Range: -300 ~ +300
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
2nd Torque Command
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set torque 2 of internal torque
command.
2nd Torque Limit
In Position and Speed mode, this parameter is used to set torque limit 2 of internal
torque command.
Revision June 2010
7-27
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P1 - 14
TQ3
3rd Torque Command or Limit
Address: 011CH, 011DH
Default: 100
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: T, P&S
Section6.4.1
Unit: %
Range: -300 ~ +300
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
3rd Speed Command
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set torque 3 of internal torque
command.
3rd Speed Limit
In Position and Speed mode, this parameter is used to set torque limit 3 of internal
torque command.
P1 - 15
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 16
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 17
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 18
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 19
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 20
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 21
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 22
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 23
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 31
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 32
LSTP
Motor Stop Mode Selection
Default: 0
Address: 0140H, 0141H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 20
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
7-28
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Settings:
A: Fault Stop Mode
0: Stop instantly
1: Decelerate to stop
When a fault occurs (except for CWL, CCWL, EMGS and serial communication
error), it is used to set servo motor stop mode.
B: Dynamic Brake Option
0: Use dynamic brake
1: Allow servo motor to coast to stop
2: Use dynamic brake first, after the motor speed is below than P1-38, allow servo
motor to coast to stop
When Servo Off or a fault (servo alarm) occurs, it is used to set servo motor stop
mode.
When the fault NL(CWL) or PL(CCWL) occurs, please refer to the settings of
parameter P1-06, P1-35, P1-36 to determine the deceleration time. If the
deceleration time is set to 1msec, the motor will stop instantly.
P1 - 33
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 34
TACC
Acceleration Time
Address: 0144H, 0145H
Default: 200
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: S
Section 6.3.3
Unit: msec
Range: 1 ~20000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to
its rated motor speed. The functions of parameters P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 are
each individual.
Please note:
1. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is set to 0, the acceleration and deceleration function will be
disabled.
Revision June 2010
7-29
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P1 - 35
TDEC
Deceleration Time
Address: 0146H, 0147H
Default: 200
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: S
Section 6.3.3
Unit: msec
Range: 1 ~ 20000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to determine the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to
its rated motor speed. The functions of parameters P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 are
each individual.
Please note:
1. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is set to 0, the acceleration and deceleration function will be
disabled.
P1 - 36
TSL
Accel /Decel S-curve
Address: 0148H, 0149H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Unit: msec
Section 6.3.3
Applicable Control Mode: S
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 10000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to make the motor run more smoothly when startup and
windup. Using this parameter can improve the motor running stability.
TACC: P1-34, Acceleration time
TDEC: P1-35, Deceleration time
TSL: P1-36, Accel /Decel S-curve
Total acceleration time = TACC + TSL
Total deceleration time = TDEC + TSL
7-30
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
The functions of parameters P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 are each individual. When
P1-36 is set to 0 (Disabled), the settings of P1-34, P1-35 are still effective. It
indicates that the parameters P1-34 and P1-35 will not become disabled even
when P1-36 is disabled.
Please note:
1. When the source of speed command is analog command, the maximum setting
value of P1-36 is set to 0, the acceleration and deceleration function will be
disabled.
P1 - 37
GDR
Ratio of Load Inertia to Servo Motor
Inertia
Default: 10
Address: 014AH, 014BH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 0.1 times
Range: 0 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Ratio of load inertia to servo motor inertia (for Rotation Motor): (J_load
/J_motor)
J_load: Total equivalent moment of inertia of external mechanical load
J_motor: Moment of inertia of servo motor
Ratio of load weight to servo motor weight (for Linear Motor): (M_load
/M_motor)(not available now but will be available soon)
M_load: Total equivalent weight of external mechanical load
M_motor: Weight of servo motor
P1 - 38
ZSPD
Zero Speed Range Setting
Default: 100
Address: 014CH, 014DH
Related Section: Table 7.B
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 0.1 r/min
Range: 0 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set output range of zero speed signal (ZSPD) and
determine when zero speed signal (ZSPD) becomes activated. ZSPD is activated
when the drive senses the motor is equal to or below the Zero Speed Range setting
as defined in parameter P1-38.
Revision June 2010
7-31
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
For Example, at default ZSPD will be activated when the drive detects the motor
rotating at speed at or below 100 r/min. ZSPD will remain activated until the motor
speed increases above 100 r/min.
P1 - 39
SSPD
Target Motor Speed
Default: 3000
Address: 014EH, 014FH
Related Section: Table 7.B
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 5000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
When target motor speed reaches its preset value, digital output (TSPD) is enabled.
When the forward and reverse speed of servo motor is equal and higher than the
setting value, the motor will reach the target motor speed, and then TSPD signal
will output.
TSPD is activated once the drive has detected the motor has reached the Target
Motor Speed setting as defined in parameter P1-39. TSPD will remain activated
until the motor speed drops below the Target Motor Speed.
P1 - 40▲ VCM
Max. Analog Speed Command or Limit
Address: 0150H, 0151H
Default: rated speed
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: S, T
Section 6.3.4
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 10000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
In Speed mode, this parameter is used to set the maximum analog speed
command based on the maximum input voltage (10V).
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set the maximum analog speed limit
based on the maximum input voltage (10V).
For example, in speed mode, if P1-40 is set to 3000 and the input voltage is 10V, it
indicates that the speed command is 3000 r/min. If P1-40 is set to 3000, but the
input voltage is changed to 5V, then the speed command is changed to 1500
r/min.
Speed Command / Limit = Input Voltage Value x Setting value of P1-40 / 10
7-32
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P1 - 41▲ TCM
Max. Analog Torque Command or Limit
Address: 0152H, 0153H
Default: 100
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.4.4
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
In Torque mode, this parameter is used to set the maximum analog torque
command based on the maximum input voltage (10V).
In PT and Speed mode, this parameter is used to set the maximum analog torque
limit based on the maximum input voltage (10V).
For example, in torque mode, if P1-41 is set to 100 and the input voltage is 10V, it
indicates that the torque command is 100% rated torque. If P1-41 is set to 100, but
the input voltage is changed to 5V, then the torque command is changed to 50%
rated torque.
Torque Command / Limit = Input Voltage Value x Setting value of P1-41 / 10
P1 - 42
MBT1
On Delay Time of Electromagnetic Brake
Address: 0154H, 0155H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.5.5
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Used to set the period of time between when the servo drive is On (Servo On) and
when electromagnetic brake output signal (BRKR) is activated.
P1 - 43
MBT2
OFF Delay Time of Electromagnetic Brake
Address: 0156H, 0157H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.5.5
Unit: msec
Range: -1000 ~ +1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Used to set the period of time between when the servo drive is Off (Servo Off) and
when electromagnetic brake output signal (BRKR) is inactivated.
Revision June 2010
7-33
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Please note:
1. When servo is commanded off and the off delay time set by P1-43 has not
elapsed, if the motor speed is lower than the setting value of P1-38, the
electromagnetic brake will be engaged regardless of the off delay time set by
P1-43.
2. When servo is commanded off and the off delay time set by P1-43 has elapsed,
if the motor speed is higher than the setting value of P1-38, electromagnetic
brake will be engaged regardless of the current motor speed.
3. When the servo drive is disabled (Servo Off) due to a fault (except AL022) or by
EMGS (Emergency stop)) being activated, if the off delay time set by P1-43 is a
negative value, it will not affect the operation of the motor. A negative value of
the off delay time is equivalent to one with a zero value.
P1 - 44▲ GR1
Electronic Gear Ratio (1st Numerator) (N1)
Address: 0158H, 0159H
Default: 16
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Section 6.2.5
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the numerator of the electronic gear ratio. The
denominator of the electronic gear ratio is set by P1-45. P2-60 ~ P2-62 are used to
set the additional numberators.
Please note:
1. In PT mode, the setting value of P1-44 can be changed only when the servo
drive is enabled (Servo On).
P1 - 45▲ GR2
Electronic Gear Ratio (Denominator) (M)
Address: 015AH, 015BH
Default: 10
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Section 6.3.6
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (231-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
7-34
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the denominator of the electronic gear ratio. The
numerator of the electronic gear ratio is set by P1-44. P2-60 ~ P2-62 are used to
set the additional numberators.
As the wrong setting may cause motor to run chaotically (out of control) and it may
lead to personnel injury, therefore, ensure to observe the following rule when
setting P1-44, P1-45.
The electronic gear ratio setting (Please also see P1-44, P2-60 ~ P2-62):
Pulse input
f1
N
M
Position
command
N
f2 = f1 x M
f1: Pulse input
f2: Position command
N: Numerator, the setting value of P1-44 or
P2-60 ~ P2-62
M: Denominator, the setting value of P1-45
The electronic gear ratio setting range must be within: 1/50<N/M<25600.
Please note:
1. In PT r mode, the setting value of P1-45 can not be changed when the servo
drive is enabled (Servo On).
P1 - 46▲ GR3
Encoder Output Pulse Number
Default: 2500
Address: 015CH, 015DH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: pulse
Range: 20 ~ 40000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the pulse numbers of encoder outputs per motor
revolution.
Please note:
When the following conditions occur, the output frequency for pulse output may
exceed the specification and cause that the servo drive fault AL018 (Encoder
Output Error) is activated.
Condition 1: Encoder error.
Condition 2: Motor speed is above the value set by parameter P1-76.
Revision June 2010
7-35
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P1 - 47
SPOK
Speed Reached Output Range
Default: 10
Address: 015EH, 015FH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: S, Sz
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 300
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the speed reached output range. The DO signal,
SP_OK will be activated when the speed error is equal and below the setting value
of P1-47.
1. Speed Command: It is the speed command input by the users (no Accel/Decel),
not the frond-end command of speed control loop. The source of this command
includes analog voltage and registers.
2. Feedback Speed: It is the actual motor speed which is filtered.
3. Get Absolute Value
4. Judge if the speed error is equal and below the setting value of P1-47: When
P1-47 is set to 0, this digital output will be always off.
5. ON or OFF: When the speed error is equal and below the setting value of P1-47,
SP_OK will be ON; otherwise, SP_OK will be OFF.
P1 - 48
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 49
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 50
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 51
Reserved (Do Not Use)
7-36
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P1 - 52
RES1
Regenerative Resistor Value
Address: 0168H, 0169H
Default: -
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.6.3
Unit: Ohm
Range: 10 ~ 750
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the resistance of the applicable regenerative resistor.
Model
For 750W models
For 1kW to 3kW models
P1 - 53
RES2
Default
100Ω
40Ω
Regenerative Resistor Capacity
Default: -
Address: 016AH, 016BH
Related Section: Section 6.6.3
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: Watt
Range: 30 ~ 3000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the capacity of the applicable regenerative resistor.
Model
P1 - 54
Default
For 750W models
60W
For 1kW to 3kW models
60W
PER
Positioning Completed Width
Default: 1600
Address: 016CH, 016DH
Related Section: Table 7.B
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit:
pulse
Range: 0 ~ 1280000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
In PT mode, when the error pulse numbers is less than the setting value of
parameter P1-54, TPOS (At positioning completed signal) will be activated.
Revision June 2010
7-37
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P1 - 55
MSPD
Maximum Speed Limit
Default: rated speed
Address: 016EH, 016FH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ Max. speed
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set maximum motor speed. The default setting is rated
speed.
P1 - 56
OVW
Output Overload Warning Time
Default: 120
Address: 0170H, 0171H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 120
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set output overload time. If the setting value of
parameter P1-56 is set to 0 ~ 100, the function of parameter P1-56 is enabled.
When the motor has reached the output overload time set by parameter P1-56, the
motor will send a warning to the drive. After the drive has detected the warning,
the DO signal OLW will be activated. If the setting value of parameter P1-56
exceeds 100, the function of parameter P1-56 is disabled.
tOL = Permissible Time for Overload x the setting value of parameter P1-56
When overload accumulated time (continuously overload time) exceeds the value
of tOL, the overload warning signal will output, i.e. DO signal, OLW will be ON.
However, if the accumulated overload time (continuous overload time) exceeds the
permissible time for overload, the overload alarm (AL006) will occur.
For example:
If the setting value of parameter P1-56 (Output Overload Warning Time) is 60%,
when the permissible time for overload exceeds 8 seconds at 200% rated output,
the overload fault (AL006) will be detected and shown on the LED display.
At this time, tOL = 8 x 60% = 4.8 seconds
Result:
When the drive output is at 200% rated output and the drive is continuously
overloaded for 4.8 seconds, the overload warning signal will be ON, i.e. DO
signal OLW will be activated. If the drive is continuously overloaded for 8 seconds,
7-38
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
the overload alarm will be detected and shown on the LED display (AL006). Then,
Servo Fault signal will be ON (DO signal ALRM will be activated).
P1 - 57
CRSHA
Motor Protection Percentage
Default: 0
Address: 0172H, 0173H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 300
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to protect the motor in case the motor touchs the
mechanical equipment. If P1-57 is set to 0, the function of P1-57 is disabled. The
function of P1-57 is enabled when the setting value of P1-57 is set to 1 or more.
The fault AL030 will be activated when the setting value of P1-57 is reached after a
period of time set by P1-58.
P1 - 58
CRSHT
Motor Protection Time
Default: 1
Address: 0174H, 0175H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to protect the motor in case the motor touchs the
mechanical equipment. The fault AL030 will be activated when the setting value
of P1-57 is reached after a period of time set by P1-58.
Please note that this function is applicable for non-contact applications, such as
electric discharge machines only (P1-37 must be set correctly).
P1 - 59
MFLT
Analog Speed Linear Filter (Moving Filter)
Default: 0
Address: 0176H, 0177H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: S
Unit: 0.1msec
Range: 0 ~ 40 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Revision June 2010
7-39
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
This parameter is used to eliminate the noise generated during the operation
when the host (external) controller sends the step analog voltage speed command.
The parameter P1-06 is Low-pass Filter and parameter P1-59 is Moving Filter. The
differences are that Low-pass Filter is usually used to smooth the end of the
command but Moving Filter can be used to smooth the start and the end of step
analog voltage speed command. Using Moving Filter can facilitate the smooth
operation of the motor very effectively.
Therefore, it is recommended to use P1-06 Low-pass Filter when the speed
command from the external controller is applied for position control loop. If the
command is for speed control only, using Moving Filter P1-59 can achieve better
(smooth) performance.
P1 - 60
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 61
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 62
FRCL
Friction Compensation Percentage
Default: 0
Address: 017CH, 017DH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: PT, S
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the torque percentage for friction compensation. If
P1-62 is set to 0, the function of P1-62 is disabled. The function of P1-62 is
enabled when the setting value of P1-62 is set to 1 or more.
7-40
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P1 - 63
FRCT
Friction Compensation Smooth Constant
Default: 0
Address: 017EH, 017FH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the smooth constant of friction compensation.
P1 - 64
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 65
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 66
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 67
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 68
PFLT2
Position Command Moving Filter
Default: 4
Address: 0188H, 0189H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: msec
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
P1 - 69
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 70
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 71
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 72
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 73
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 74
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P1 - 75
Reserved (Do Not Use)
Revision June 2010
7-41
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P1 - 76
AMSPD
Max. Rotation Speed of Encoder Output
Default: 5500
Address: 0198H, 0199H
Related Section: P1-46
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 6000 (0: Disabled)
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to optimize the encoder outputs (OA, OB). When the users
set the actual reached maximum motor speed, the servo drive will equalize the
encoder outputs automatically. When P1-76 is set to 0, it indicates that equalizing
function is not available.
7-42
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Group 2: P2-xx Extension Parameters
P2 - 00
KPP
Proportional Position Loop Gain
Address: 0200H, 0201H
Default: 35
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Section 6.2.8
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 2047
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the position loop gain. It can increase stiffness,
expedite position loop response and reduce position error. However, if the setting
value is over high, it may generate vibration or noise.
P2 - 01
PPR
Position Loop Gain Switching Rate
Address: 0202H, 0203H
Default: 100
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Section 6.2.8
Unit: %
Range: 10 ~ 500
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the position gain switching rate when the gain
switching condition is satisfied. Please refer to P2-27 for gain switching control
selection settings and refer to P2-29 for gain switching condition settings.
P2 - 02
PFG
Position Feed Forward Gain
Address: 0204H, 0205H
Default: 50
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Section 6.2.8
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the feed forward gain when executing position
control command. When using position smooth command, increase gain can
improve position track deviation. When not using position smooth command,
decrease gain can improve the resonance condition of mechanical system.
Revision June 2010
7-43
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 03
PFF
Smooth Constant of Position Feed
Forward Gain
Default: 5
Address: 0206H, 0207H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: msec
Range: 2 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
When using position smooth command, increase gain can improve position track
deviation. When not using position smooth command, decrease gain can improve
the resonance condition of mechanical system.
P2 - 04
KVP
Proportional Speed Loop Gain
Address: 0208H, 0209H
Default: 500
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.6
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 8191
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the speed loop gain. When the value of proportional
speed loop gain is increased, it can expedite speed loop response. However, if the
setting value is over high, it may generate vibration or noise.
P2 - 05
SPR
Speed Loop Gain Switching Rate
Default: 100
Address: 020AH, 020BH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: %
Range: 10 ~ 500
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the speed gain switching rate when the gain
switching condition is satisfied. Please refer to P2-27 for gain switching control
selection settings and refer to P2-29 for gain switching condition settings.
7-44
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 06
KVI
Speed Integral Compensation
Address: 020CH, 020DH
Default: 100
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.6
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 1023
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the integral time of speed loop. When the value of
speed integral compensation is increased, it can improve the speed response
ability and decrease the speed control deviation. However, if the setting value is
over high, it may generate vibration or noise.
P2 - 07
KVF
Speed Feed Forward Gain
Address: 020EH, 020FH
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.6
Unit: %
Range: 0 ~ 100
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the feed forward gain when executing speed control
command.
When using speed smooth command, increase gain can improve speed track
deviation.
When not using speed smooth command, decrease gain can improve the
resonance condition of mechanical system.
P2 - 08■ PCTL
Special Factory Setting
Default: 0
Address: 0210H, 0211H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 65535
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter can be used to reset all parameters to their original factory
settings and enable some parameters functions.
Reset parameters settings:
Revision June 2010
7-45
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
10: Users can reset all parameter values to factory defaults. All parameter values
will be reset after re-power the servo drive. (Before perform this settings, ensure
that the status of the servo drive is “Servo Off”.)
Enable parameters functions:
20: If P2-08 is set to 20, then the parameter P4-10 is enabled.
22: If P2-08 is set to 22, then the parameters P4-11~P4-19 are enabled.
406: If P2-08 is set to 406, then the Digital Output (DO) signal can be forced to be
activated and the drive will enter into Force Output Control operation mode.
400: If P2-08 is set to 400, it can switch the Force Output Control operation mode
to normal Digital Output (DO) Control operation mode.
P2 - 09
DRT
Bounce Filter
Default: 2
Address: 0212H, 0213H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 2msec
Range: 0 ~ 20
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
For example, if P2-09 is set to 5, the bounce filter time is 5 x 2msec = 10msec.
When there are too much vibration or noises around environment, increasing this
setting value (bounce filter time) can improve reliability. However, if the time is too
long, it may affect the response time.
P2 - 10
DI1
Digital Input Terminal 1 (DI1)
Default: 101
Address: 0214H, 0215H
Related Section: Table 7.A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
The parameters from P2-10 to P2-17 and P2-36 are used to determine the
functions and statuses of DI1 ~ DI8.
7-46
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
A: DI (Digital Input) Function Settings:
For the setting value of P2- 10 ~ P2-17 and P2-36, please refer to Table 7.A.
B: DI (Digital Input) Enabled Status Settings:
0: Normally closed (contact b)
1: Normally open (contact a)
For example, when P2-10 is set to 101, it indicates that the function of DI1 is SON
(Servo On, setting value is 0x01) and it requires a normally open contact to be
connected to it.
Please re-start the servo drive after parameters have been changed.
Please note:
The parameter P3-06 is used to set how the Digital Inputs (DI) accept commands
and signals through the external terminals or via the communication which is
determined by parameter P4-07.
P2 - 11
DI2
Digital Input Terminal 2 (DI2)
Default: 104
Address: 0216H, 0217H
Related Section: Table 7.A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.
P2 - 12
DI3
Digital Input Terminal 3 (DI3)
Default: 116
Address: 0218H, 0219H
Related Section: Table 7.A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.
P2 - 13
DI4
Digital Input Terminal 4 (DI4)
Default: 117
Address: 021AH, 021BH
Related Section: Table 7.A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Revision June 2010
7-47
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.
P2 - 14
DI5
Digital Input Terminal 5 (DI5)
Default: 102
Address: 021CH, 021DH
Related Section: Table 7.A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.
P2 - 15
DI6
Digital Input Terminal 6 (DI6)
Default: 22
Address: 021EH, 021FH
Related Section: Table 7.A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.
P2 - 16
DI7
Digital Input Terminal 7 (DI7)
Default: 23
Address: 0220H, 0221H
Related Section: Table 7.A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.
P2 - 17
DI8
Digital Input Terminal 8 (DI8)
Default: 21
Address: 0222H, 0223H
Related Section: Table 7.A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-10 for explanation.
7-48
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 18
DO1
Digital Output Terminal 1 (DO1)
Default: 101
Address: 0224H, 0225H
Related Section: Table 7.B
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 013Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
The parameters from P2-18 to P2-22 and P2-37 are used to determine the
functions and statuses of DO1 ~ DO5.
A: DO Function Settings:
For the setting value of P2- 18 ~ P2-22 and P2-37, please refer to Table 7.B.
B: DO Enabled Status Settings:
0: Normally closed (contact b)
1: Normally open (contact a)
For example, when P2-18 is set to 101, it indicates that the function of DO1 is
SRDY (Servo ready, setting value is 0x01) and it requires a normally open contact
to be connected to it.
Please re-start the servo drive after parameters have been changed.
P2 - 19
DO2
Digital Output Terminal 2 (DO2)
Default: 103
Address: 0226H, 0227H
Related Section: Table 7.B
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 013Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-18 for explanation.
P2 - 20
DO3
Digital Output Terminal 3 (DO3)
Default: 109
Address: 0228H, 0229H
Related Section: Table 7.B
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 013Fh
Revision June 2010
7-49
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-18 for explanation.
P2 - 21
DO4
Digital Output Terminal 4 (DO4)
Default: 105
Address: 022AH, 022BH
Related Section: Table 7.B
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 013Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-18 for explanation.
P2 - 22
DO5
Digital Output Terminal 5 (DO5)
Default: 7
Address: 022CH, 022DH
Related Section: Table 7.B
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 013Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-18 for explanation.
P2 - 23
NCF1
Notch Filter 1 (Resonance Suppression)
Address: 022EH, 022FH
Default: 1000
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.7
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set first resonance frequency of mechanical system. It
can be used to suppress the resonance of mechanical system and reduce the
vibration of mechanical system.
If P2-24 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
The parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are the first group of notch filter parameters and
the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are the second group of notch filter parameters.
7-50
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 24
Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 1
(Resonance Suppression)
DPH1
Address: 0230H, 0231H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.7
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set magnitude of the resonance suppression that is set
by parameter P2-23. If P2-24 is set to 0, the parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are both
disabled.
The parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are the first group of notch filter parameters and
the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are the second group of notch filter parameters.
P2 - 25
Low-pass Filter Time Constant
(Resonance Suppression)
NLP
Default: 2 (1kW and below models) or
5 (other models)
Address: 0232H, 0233H
Related Section:
Section 6.3.7
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 0.1 msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set low-pass filter time constant of resonance
suppression.
If P2-25 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
P2 - 26
DST
External Anti-Interference Gain
Default: 0
Address: 0234H, 0235H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 0.001
Range: 0 ~ 1023
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
If P2-26 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
Revision June 2010
7-51
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 27
GCC
Gain Switching Control Selection
Default: 0
Address: 0236H, 0237H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 4
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
Gain Switching Condition Settings:
A: Gain Switching Condition Settings:
0: Disabled
1: Gain switching DI (Digital Input) signal (GAINUP) is On. (see Table 8.A)
2: In position mode, position deviation is higher than the setting value of P2-29.
3: Position command frequency is higher than the setting value of P2-29.
4: Servo motor speed is higher than the setting value of P2-29.
5: Gain switching DI (Digital Input) signal (GAINUP) is Off. (see Table 8.A)
6: In position mode, position deviation is lower than the setting value of P2-29.
7: Position command frequency is lower than the setting value of P2-29.
8: Servo motor speed is lower than the setting value of P2-29.
B: Gain Switching Control Settings:
0: Gain multiple switching
1: P Æ PI switching
Setting
0
1
7-52
P mode
S mode
Status
P2-00 x 100%
P2-04 x 100%
P2-04 x 100%
Before switching
P2-00 x P2-01
P2-04 x P2-05
P2-04 x P2-05
After switching
P2-06 x 0%
P2-26 x 0%
Before switching
P2-06 x 100%
P2-26 x 100%
After switching
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 28
GUT
Gain Switching Time Constant
Default: 10
Address: 0238H, 0239H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 10msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the time constant when switching the smooth gain.
P2 - 29
GPE
Gain Switching Condition
Default: 160000
Address: 023AH, 023BH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: pulse, Kpps, r/min
Range: 0 ~ 3840000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the value of gain switching condition (pulse error,
Kpps, r/min) selected in P2-27. The setting value will be different depending on
the different gain switching condition.
P2 - 30■ INH
Auxiliary Function
Default: 0
Address: 023CH, 023DH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: -8 ~ +8
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
0: Disabled all functions described below.
1: Force the servo drive to be Servo On (upon software)
2: Reserved
3: Reserved
4: Reserved
5: After setting P2-30 to 5, the setting values of all parameters will lost (not remain
in memory) at power-down. When the parameters data are no more needed, using
this mode can allows users not to save parameters data into memory without
Revision June 2010
7-53
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
damaging the EEPROM. P2-30 should be set to 5 when using communication
control function.
6: After setting P2-30 to 6, the servo drive will enter into Simulation mode. At this
time, DO signal SRDY (Servo ready) will be activated. The servo drive can accept
commands in each mode and monitor the commands via Data Scope function
provided by ASDA-Soft software program. But, the servo motor will not run when
the servo drvie in Simulation mode. This setting is only used to check and ensure
the command is correct. It indicates the external Servo On signal is disabled in this
mode, and therefore the motor fault messages such as overcurrent, overload, or
overspeed, etc. will not display. The paraemeter P0-01 displays external fault
messages such as reverse inhibit limit, forward inhibit limit, or emergency stop,
etc. only.
Please note:
1. Please set P2-30 to 0 during normal operation.
2. When the communication control function is used, ensure that P2-30 is set to
5.
3. The setting value of P2-30 will return to 0 automatically after re-power the
servo drive.
P2 - 31
AUT1
Speed Frequency Response Level in Auto
and Semi-Auto Mode
Address: 023EH, 023FH
Default: 80
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 5.6, Section 6.3.6
Unit: Hz
Range: 1 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter allows the users to set the speed frequency response level of
auto-tuning and semi-auto tuning mode. The speed frequency response settings
are as follows:
1 ~ 50Hz : Low stiffness and low frequency response
51 ~ 250Hz : Medium stiffness and medium frequency response
251 ~ 550Hz : High stiffness and high frequency response
Please note:
1. The servo drive will set the position frequency response according to the
setting value of P2-31.
2. This parameter is activated by P2-32. Please refer to Section 5.6 for the tuning
procedure and the related settings.
7-54
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 32▲ AUT2
Tuning Mode Selection
Address: 0240H, 0241H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 5.6, Section 6.3.6
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 2
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
0: Manual mode
1: Auto Mode [Continuous adjustment]
2: Semi-Auto Mode [Non-continuous adjustment]
Explanation of manual mode:
1. When P2-32 is set to mode#0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06,
P2-07, P2-25 and P2-26 can be user-defined. When switching mode #1 or #2 to
#0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06, P2-07, P2-25 and P2-26 will
change to the value that measured in #1 auto-tuning mode or #2 semi-auto
tuning mode.
Explanation of auto-tuning mode:
The servo drive will continuously estimate the system inertia, save the measured
load inertia value automatically and memorized in P1-37 every 30 minutes by
referring to the frequency response settings of P2-31.
1. When switching mode #1 or #2 to #0, the servo drive will continuously
estimate the system inertia, save the measured load inertia value automatically
and memorized in P1-37. Then, set the corresponding parameters according to
this measured load inertia value.
2. When switching mode#0 or #1 to #2, enter the appropriate load inertia value in
P1-37.
3. When switching mode#1 to #0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-04 and P2-06 will
change to the value that measured in #1 auto-tuning mode.
Explanation of semi-auto tuning mode:
1. When switching mode #2 to #0, the setting value of P2-00, P2-04, P2-06, P2-25
and P2-26 will change to the value that measured in #1 auto-tuning mode.
2. After the system inertia becomes stable (The displau of P2-33 will show 1), it
will stop estimating the system inertia, save the measured load inertia value
automatically, and memorized in P1-37. However, when P2-32 is set to
mode#1 or #2, the servo drive will continuously perform the adjustment for a
period of time.
3. When the value of the system inertia becomes over high, the display of P2-33
will show 0 and the servo drive will start to adjust the load inertia value
continuously.
Revision June 2010
7-55
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 33▲ AUT3
Semi-Auto Mode Inertia Adjustment
Selection
Default: 0
Address: 0242H, 0243H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 1
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
When the setting value of A is set to 0 or display is 0, it indicates that the load
inertia estimation of semi-auto tuning mode has been executed but not been
completed yet.
When the setting value of A is set to 1, it indicates that the load inertia estimation
of semi-auto tuning mode has been completed. The measured load inertia is
memorized in P1-37. If P2-33 is reset to 0, the servo drive will perform continuous
adjustment for estimating the load inertia (P1-37) again.
B: Reserved.
P2 - 34
SDEV
Overspeed Warning Condition
Default: 5000
Address: 0244H, 0245H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: S
Unit: r/min
Range: 1 ~ 6000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the over speed threshold that is used to determine
the over speed fault condition. When the difference in speed between the desired
speed and actual motor speed is over than the setting value of parameter P2-34,
the servo fault, Overspeed (AL007) will be activated.
7-56
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 35
PDEV
Excessive Error Warning Condition
Address: 0246H, 0247H
Default: 480000
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ 16000000
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the position deviation excessive error threshold that
is used to determine the escessive deviation fault condition. When the difference
in pulse number between the desired position and actual motor position is over
than the setting value of parameter P2-35, the servo fault, Excessive Deviation
(AL009) will be activated.
P2 - 36
DI9
External Digital Input Terminal 9 (DI9)
Default: 0
Address: 0248H, 0249H
Related Section: Table 7.A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 015Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
The parameters from P2-36 to P2-41 are used to determine the functions and
statuses of external DI9 ~ DI14.
A: DI (Digital Input) Function Settings:
For the setting value of P2- 36 ~ P2-41, please refer to Table 7.A.
B: External DI (Digital Input) Enabled Status Settings:
0: Normally closed (contact b)
1: Normally open (contact a)
Revision June 2010
7-57
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 37
DO6
Digital Output Terminal 6 (DO6)
Default: 7
Address: 024AH, 024BH
Related Section: Table 7.B
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 013Fh
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings: Refer to P2-18 for explanation.
P2 - 38
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 39
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 40
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 41
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 42
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 43
NCF2
Notch Filter 2 (Resonance Suppression)
Address: 0256H, 0257H
Default: 1000
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.7
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set second resonance frequency of mechanical system.
It can be used to suppress the resonance of mechanical system and reduce the
vibration of mechanical system.
If P2-43 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
The parameters P2-23 and P2-24 are the first group of notch filter parameters and
the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are the second group of notch filter parameters.
P2 - 44
DPH2
Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 2
(Resonance Suppression)
Address: 0258H, 0259H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.7
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
7-58
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set magnitude of the resonance suppression that is set
by parameter P2-43. If P2-44 is set to 0, the parameters P2-43 and P2-44 are both
disabled.
P2 - 45
NCF3
Notch Filter 3 (Resonance Suppression)
Address: 025AH, 025BH
Default: 1000
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.7
Unit: Hz
Range: 50 ~ 2000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set third resonance frequency of mechanical system. It
can be used to suppress the resonance of mechanical system and reduce the
vibration of mechanical system.
If P2-45 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
P2 - 46
DPH3
Notch Filter Attenuation Rate 3
(Resonance Suppression)
Address: 025CH, 025DH
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.7
Unit: dB
Range: 0 ~ 32
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set magnitude of the resonance suppression that is set
by parameter P2-45. If P2-46 is set to 0, the parameters P2-45 and P2-46 are both
disabled.
P2 - 47
ANCF
Auto Resonance Suppression Mode
Selection
Default: 1
Address: 025EH, 025FH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 2
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Revision June 2010
7-59
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Settings:
0: Disable Auto Resonance Suppression Mode.
The setting value of P2-23~P2-24 and P2-43~P2-46 will be fixed and will not be
changed.
1: Auto Resonance Suppression Mode 1 [Non-continuous adjustment]
After the resonance is suppressed, the setting value of P2-23, P2-24, P2-43,
P2-44, P2-45 and P2-46 will be fixed and will not be changed.
2: Auto Resonance Suppression Mode 2 [Continuous adjustment]
The servo drive will perform the resonance suppression continuously (will not
stop). The setting value of P2-23, P2-24, P2-43, P2-44, P2-45 and P2-46 will not
be fixed.
When P2-47 is set to 1, the resonance suppression will be enabled automatically.
After the mechanical system becomes stable, the setting value of P2-47 will return
to 0. When the mechanical system is stable, the resonance suppression point will
be memorized. When the mechanical system is not stable, if the servo drive is
restarted or P2-47 is set to 1, the servo drive will estimate the resonance
suppression point again.
When P2-47 is set to 2, the servo drive will perform the resonance suppression
continuously. When the mechanical system becomes stable, the resonance
suppression point will be memorized. When the mechanical system is not stable, if
the servo drive is restarted, the servo drive will estimate the resonance
suppression point again.
When switching the mode#1 or #2 to #0, the setting values of P2-43, P2-44, P2-45
and P2-46 will be saved automatically.
P2 - 48
ANCL
Auto Resonance Suppression Detection
Level
Default: 100
Address: 0260H, 0261H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 1 ~ 300%
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
When the setting value is smaller, the system will become more sensitive to detect
and find the resonance.
When the value of ↑
The setting value of P2-48 ↑, the sensitivity of detecting resonance ↓.
The setting value of P2-48 ↓, the sensitivity of detecting resonance ↑.
7-60
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 49
SJIT
Speed Detection Filter and Jitter
Suppression
Address: 0262H, 0263H
Default: 0
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: sec
Range: 0 ~ 1F
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Setting Value of P2-49
00
01
Cutoff Frequency of Speed Loop Feedback (Hz)
2500
2250
02
2100
03
2000
04
1800
05
1600
06
1500
07
1400
08
1300
09
1200
0A
1100
0B
1000
0C
950
0D
900
0E
850
0F
800
10
750
11
700
12
650
13
600
14
550
15
500
16
450
17
400
18
350
19
300
1A
250
1B
200
1C
175
1D
150
1E
125
1F
100
Revision June 2010
7-61
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 50
DCLR
Pulse Deviation Clear Mode
Default: 0
Address: 0264H, 0265H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 2
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
For digital input function (DI function), please refer to Table 7.A.
This pulse deviation clear function is enabled when a digital input is set to pulse
clear function (CCLR mode, DI (Digital Input) setting value is 0x04). When this
input is triggered, the position accumulated pulse number will be clear to 0.
(available in PT mode only)
0: CCLR is triggered by rising-edge
1: CCLR is triggered bu level
P2 - 51
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 52
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 53
KPI
Position Integral Compensation
Address: 026AH, 026BH
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.3.6
Unit: rad/s
Range: 0 ~ 1023
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the integral time of position loop. When the value of
position integral compensation is increased, it can decrease the position control
deviation. However, if the setting value is over high, it may generate position
overshoot or noise.
P2 - 54
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 55
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 56
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 57
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 58
Reserved (Do Not Use)
7-62
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 59
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 60
GR4
Electronic Gear Ratio (2nd Numerator)
(N2)
Default: 16
Address: 0278H, 0279H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
The electronic gear numerator value can be set via GNUM0, GNUM1 (refer to Table
8.A).
When the GNUM0, GNUM1 are not defined, the default of gear numerator value is
set by P1-44.
When the users wish to set the gear numerator value by using GNUM0, GNUM1,
please set P2-60 ~ P2-62 after the servo motor has been stopped to prevent the
mechanical system vibration.
P2 - 61
GR5
Electronic Gear Ratio (3rd Numerator)
(N3)
Default: 16
Address: 027AH, 027BH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P2-60 for explanation.
Revision June 2010
7-63
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 62
GR6
Electronic Gear Ratio (4th Numerator) (N4)
Default: 16
Address: 027CH, 027DH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: PT
Unit: pulse
Range: 1 ~ (226-1)
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P2-60 for explanation.
P2 - 63
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 64
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P2 - 65
GBIT
Special Function 1
Default: 0
Address: 0282H, 0283H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: PT, S
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0xFF
Data Size: N/A
Display Format: N/A
Settings:
Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit2
Bit2 ~ Bit5: Reserved. Must be set to 0.
Bit6
Bit6: Abnormal pulse command detection
0: enable abnormal pulse command detection
1: disable abnormal pulse command detection
Bit8
Bit8: U, V, W wiring error detection
1: enable U, V, W wiring error detection
Bit9
Bit9: U, V, W wiring cut-off detection
1: enable U, V, W wiring cut-off detection
7-64
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Bit10
Bit10: DI ZCLAMP function selection
When the following conditions are all met, ZCLAMP function will be activated.
Condition1: Speed mode
Condition2: DI ZCLAMP is activated.
Condition3: External analog speed command or internal registers speed
command is less than parameter P1-38.
0: When the command source is an analog speed command, the users can use
ZCLAMP DI signal to stop the motor at the desire position and do not care the
acceleration and deceleration speed curve of the analog speed command. The
motor will be locked at the position when ZCLAMP conditions are satisfied.
0: When the command source is an internal speed command, the users can use
ZCLAMP DI signal to stop the motor at the desire position and keep the the
acceleration and deceleration speed curve of the internal speed command. The
motor will be locked at the position when ZCLAMP conditions are satisfied.
1: When the command source is an analog speed command, the users can use
ZCLAMP DI signal to stop the motor at the desire position and do not care the
acceleration and deceleration speed curve of the internal speed command.
When ZCLAMP conditions are satisfied, the speed command is decreased to 0
r/min. When ZCLAMP conditions are not satisfied, the speed command will
follow the analog speed command through Accel/Decel S-curve.
Revision June 2010
7-65
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
1: When the command source is an internal speed command, the users can use
ZCLAMP DI signal to stop the motor at the desire position and keep the
acceleration and deceleration speed curve of the analog speed command.
When ZCLAMP conditions are satisfied, the speed command is forced to 0
r/min directly.
B11
Bit11: NL(CWL)/PL(CCWL) pulse input inhibit function
0: Disable NL(CWL)/PL(CCWL) pulse input inhibit function. In PT mode, no matter
NL or PL exists or not, external position pulse command will be input into the
servo drive.
1: Enable NL(CWL)/PL(CCWL) pulse input inhibit function. In PT mode, if NL exists,
the external NL pulse input into the servo drive will be inhibited and PL pulse
input will be accepted. On the one hand, in PT mode, if PL exists, the external
PL pulse input into the servo drive will be inhibited and PL pulse input will be
accepted.
Please note:
If NL and PL both exist, NL and PL pulse input into the servo drive will be both
inhibited.
7-66
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Bit12
Bit12: Input power phase loss detection function
0: Enable Input power phase loss (AL022) detection function
1: Disable Input power phase loss (AL022) detection function
Bit13
Bit13: Encoder output error detection function
0: Enable encoder output error (AL018) detection function
1: Disable encoder output error (AL018) detection function
Bit15
Bit14
Bit14 ~ Bit15: Reserved. Must be set to 0.
P2 - 66
GBIT2
Special Function 2
Default: 0
Address: 0284H, 0285H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: PT, S
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x000F
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Bit1
Bit0
Bit0 ~ Bit1: Reserved. Must be set to 0.
Bit2
Bit2: Undervoltage (Servo Drive Fault) clear mode selection
0: The fault, Undervoltage will not be cleared automatically.
1: The fault, Undervoltage will be cleared automatically.
Bit7
Bit6
Bit5
Bit4
Bit3
Bit3 ~ Bit7: Reserved. Must be set to 0.
Revision June 2010
7-67
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P2 - 67
JSL
Stable Inertia Estimating Time
Default: 1.5
Address: 0286H, 0287H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 0.1times
Range: 0 ~ 200.0
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
In semi-auto tuning mode, after the servo drive continuously perform the
adjustment for a period of time which is determined by P2-67, the system will
consider that the system inertia has become stable and finish the operation of
system inertia estimation.
7-68
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Group 3: P3-xx
P3 - 00
Communication Parameters
ADR
Communication Address Setting
Address: 0300H, 0301H
Default: 0x7F
Related Section: Section 8.2
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x01 ~ 0x7F
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the communication slave address in hexadecimal
format. This address is an absolute address which represents the servo drive on a
RS-232/485 or CANbus network.
Display
0
0
Y
X
Range
-
-
0~7
0~F
X: Axis number, the value must be within the range from 0 through F.
Y: Group number, the value must be within the range from 0 to through 7
If the AC servo drive is controlled by RS-232/485 communication, each drive (or
device) must be uniquely identified. One servo drive only can set one address. If
the address is duplicated, there will be a communication fault.
Please note:
1. This parameter does not provide broadcast function and does not respond
insecurity.
2. When the address of host (external) controller is set to 0xFF, it is with
auto-respond function. Then, the servo drive will receive from and respond to
host (external) controller both no matter the address is matching or not.
However, the parameter P3-00 cannot be set to 0xFF.
P3 - 01
BRT
Transmission Speed
Default: 0x0203
Address: 0302H, 0303H
Related Section: Section 8.2
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: bps
Range: 0x0000 ~ 0x0055
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the baud rate and data transmission speed of the
communications.
Revision June 2010
7-69
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Display
0
Z
Y
X
COM Port
-
-
RS-485
RS-232
Range
0
0
0~5
0~5
X: Baud rate setting
0: Baud rate 4800
1: Baud rate 9600
2: Baud rate 19200
3: Baud rate 38400
4: Baud rate 57600
5: Baud rate 115200
P3 - 02
PTL
Communication Protocol
Default: 0x0066
Address: 0304H, 0305H
Related Section: Section 8.2
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x0000 ~ 0x0088
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the communication protocol. The alphanumeric
characters represent the following: 7 or 8 is the number of data bits; N, E or O
refers to the parity bit, Non, Even or Odd; the 1 or 2 is the numbers of stop bits.
0: Modbus ASCII mode, <7,N,2>
1: Modbus ASCII mode, <7,E,1 >
2: Modbus ASCII mode, <7,O,1>
3: Modbus ASCII mode, <8,N,2 >
4: Modbus ASCII mode, <8,E,1>
5: Modbus ASCII mode, <8,O,1>
6: Modbus RTU mode, <8,N,2>
7: Modbus RTU mode, <8,E,1>
8: Modbus RTU mode, <8,O,1>
P3 - 03
FLT
Transmission Fault Treatment
Default: 0
Address: 0306H, 0307H
Related Section: Section 8.2
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 1
Data Size: 16-bit
7-70
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
0: Display fault and continue operating
1: Display fault and decelerate to stop operating
This parameter is used to determine the operating sequence once a
communication fault has been detected. If '1' is selected, the drive will stop
operating upon detection the communication fault. The mode of stopping is set by
parameter P1-32.
P3 - 04
CWD
Communication Time Out Detection
Default: 0
Address: 0308H, 0309H
Related Section: Section 8.2
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: sec
Range: 0 ~ 20
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the maximum permissible time before detecting a
fault due to communication time out. When P3-04 is set to a value over than 0, it
indicates this parameter is enabled. However, if not communicating with the servo
in this period of time, the servo drive will assume the communication has failed
and show the communication error fault message.
When P3-04 is set to 0, this parameter is disabled.
P3 - 05
CMM
Communication Selection
Default: 1
Address: 030AH, 030BH
Related Section: Section 8.2
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x00 ~ 0x01
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
Communication interface selection
0: RS-232 via Modbus communication
1: RS-232 upon ASDA-Soft software
Revision June 2010
7-71
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P3 - 06■ SDI
Digital Input Communication Function
Default: 0
Address: 030CH, 030DH
Related Section: Section 8.2
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0x0000 ~ 0x1FFF
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
The setting of this parameter determines how the Digital Inputs (DI) accept
commands and signals.
Bit0 ~ Bit 8 corresponds with DI1 ~ DI9. The least significant bit (Bit0) shows DI1
status and the most significant bit (Bit7) shows DI8 status.
Bit settings:
0: Digital input is controlled by external command (via CN1)
1: Digital input is controlled by parameter P4-07
For the settings of DI1 ~ DI9, please refer to P2-10 ~ P2-17 and P2-36.
This parameter P3-06 also works in conjunction with the parameter P4-07 which
has several functions. Please see section 8.2 for details.
P3 - 07
CDT
Communication Response Delay Time
Default: 0
Address: 030EH, 030FH
Related Section: Section 8.2
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: 1msec
Range: 0 ~ 1000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to delay the communication time that servo drive responds
to host controller (external controller).
P3 - 08■ MNS
Monitor Mode
Default: 0000
Address: 0310H, 0311H
Related Section: Section 8.2
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: refer to the description of Settings
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to monitor the data of the servo drive via communication.
7-72
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
The monitor data can be displayed on PC upon the data scope function provided
by ASDA-Soft software.
Byte
-
-
Function
-
-
Range
0
0
Low
High
Monitor mode
0
0~3
H: Monitor mode, the value must be within the range from 0 through 3.
0: Disabled, i.e. disable monitor function.
1: Reserved.
2: High-speed monitor mode. The sampling time is 2000 times per second and 4
channels can be monitored.
3: High-speed monitor mode. The sampling time is 4000 times per second and 2
channels can be monitored.
P3 - 09
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P3 - 10
Reserved (Do Not Use)
P3 - 11
Reserved (Do Not Use)
Revision June 2010
7-73
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Group 4: P4-xx
Diagnosis Parameters
P4 - 00★ ASH1
Fault Record (N)
Address: 0400H, 0401H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.4.1
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the most recent fault record.
Display of Low Byte: LXXXX: It indicates the fault code, i.e. alarm code
Display of High Byte: hYYYY: Reserved.
P4 - 01★ ASH2
Fault Record (N-1)
Address: 0402H, 0403H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.4.1
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the second most recent fault record.
P4 - 02★ ASH3
Fault Record (N-2)
Address: 0404H, 0405H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.4.1
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the third most recent fault record.
P4 - 03★ ASH4
Fault Record (N-3)
Address: 0406H, 0407H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.4.1
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
7-74
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the fourth most recent fault record.
P4 - 04★ ASH5
Fault Record (N-4)
Address: 0408H, 0409H
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.4.1
Unit: N/A
Range: N/A
Data Size: 32-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to set the fifth most recent fault record.
P4 - 05
JOG
JOG Operation
Default: 20
Address: 040AH, 040BH
Related Section: Section 4.4.2
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: r/min
Range: 0 ~ 5000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
JOG operation command:
1. Operation Test
(1) Press the SET key to display the JOG speed. (The default value is 20 r/min).
(2) Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to increase or decrease the desired JOG
speed. (This also can be undertaken by using the SHIFT key to move the
cursor to the desired unit column (the effected number will flash) then
changed using the UP and DOWN arrow keys).
(3) Press the SET when the desired JOG speed is displayed. The Servo Drive will
display "JOG".
(4) Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to jog the motor either P(CCW) or N(CW)
direction. The motor will only rotation while the arrow key is activated.
(5) To change JOG speed again, press the MODE key. The servo Drive will
display "P4 - 05". Press the SET key and the JOG speed will displayed again.
Refer back to #(2) and #(3) to change speed.
(6) In JOG operation mode, if any fault occurs, the motor will stop running. The
maximum JOG speed is the rated speed of the servo motor.
Revision June 2010
7-75
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
2. DI Signal Control
Set the value of DI signal as JOGU and JOGD (refer to Table 8.A).
Users can perform JOG run forward and run reverse control.
3. Communication Control
To perform a JOG Operation via communication command, use communication
addresses 040AH and 040BH.
(1) Enter 1 ~ 5000 for the desired JOG speed
(2) Enter 4998 to JOG in the P(CCW) direction
(3) Enter 4999 to JOG in the N(CW) direction
(4) Enter 0 to stop the JOG operation
Please note that when using communication control, please set P2-30 to 5 to
avoid that there are excessive writes to the system flash memory.
P4 - 06
▲■
FOT
Force Output Contact Control
Address: 040CH, 040DH
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.4.3
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0xFF
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
The function of Digital Outout (DO) is determined by the DO setting value. The
user can set DO setting value (0x30 ~ 0x3F) via communication and then write the
values into P4-06 to complete the settings.
Bit00 corresponds with DO setting value 0x30
Bit01 corresponds with DO setting value 0x31
Bit02 corresponds with DO setting value 0x32
Bit03 corresponds with DO setting value 0x33
Bit04 corresponds with DO setting value 0x34
Bit05 corresponds with DO setting value 0x35
Bit06 corresponds with DO setting value 0x36
Bit07 corresponds with DO setting value 0x37
Bit08 corresponds with DO setting value 0x38
Bit09 corresponds with DO setting value 0x39
Bit10 corresponds with DO setting value 0x3A
Bit11 corresponds with DO setting value 0x3B
Bit12 corresponds with DO setting value 0x3C
Bit13 corresponds with DO setting value 0x3D
7-76
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Bit14 corresponds with DO setting value 0x3E
Bit15 corresponds with DO setting value 0x3F
For example:
When P2-18 is set to 0x0130, it indicates that the state of DO1 is the Bit00 state of
P4-06.
This parameter can also be used to force the state of DO signal. Please refer to
P2-18 ~ P2-22 to assign the functions of digital outouts (DO signals) and section
4.4.3 for the Force Outputs Operation.
P4 - 07■ ITST
Input Status
Address: 040EH, 040FH
Default: 0
Related Section: Section 4.4.4
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 8.2
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 01FF
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
The control of digital inputs can be determined by the external terminals (DI1 ~
DI9) or by the internal software digital inputs SDI1 ~ SDI9 (corresponds to Bit0 ~
Bit8 of P1-47) via communication (upon software). Please refer to P3-06 and
section 8.2 for the setting method.
P3-06
External DIs
Read or Write
Final DI Status
Internal DIs
Read P4-07: Display the final status of DI input signal.
Write P4-07: Write the status of software digital inputs SDI1 ~ SDI9
(No matter the servo drive is controller through digital keypad or communication
control, the function of this parameter is the same.)
For example:
External Control: Display the final status of DI input signal
When the read value of P4-07 is 0x0011, it indicates that DI1 and DI5 are ON.
Communication Control (Internal DIs): Read the status of input signal (upon
software).
For example:
When the write value of P4-07 is 0x0011, it indicates that software digital inputs
SDI1 and SDI5 are ON.
Bit0 ~ Bit8 corresponds with DI1 ~ DI9.
For the settings of DI1 ~ DI9, please refer to P2-10 ~ P2-17 and P2-36.
Revision June 2010
7-77
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P4 - 08★ PKEY
Digital Keypad Input of Servo Drive
Default: N/A
Address: 0410H, 0411H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: Read only
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
This parameter is used to check if MODE, UP, DOWN, SHIFT, and SET keys on the
drive keypad being pressed or not. It is used to examine if these five keys work
normally via communication during production.
P4 - 09★ MOT
Output Status
Address: 0412H, 0413H
Default: N/A
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 4.4.5
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 0x1F
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Hexadecimal
Settings:
There is no difference when reading DO output signal via the drive keypad or the
communication. For the status of DO output signal, please refer to P2-18 ~ P2-22.
P4 - 10■ CEN
Adjustment Function
Default: 0
Address: 0414H, 0415H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 6
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
0: Reserved
1: Execute analog speed input drift adjustment
2: Execute analog torque input drift adjustment
3: Execute current detector (V phase) drift adjustment
4: Execute current detector (W phase) drift adjustment
5: Execute drift adjustment of the above 1~4
6: Execute IGBT NTC calibration
7-78
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Please note:
1. This adjustment function is enabled after parameter P2-08 is set to 20.
2. When executing any adjustment, the external wiring connected to analog
speed or torque must be removed and the servo system should be off (Servo
off).
P4 - 11
SOF1
Analog Speed Input Drift Adjustment 1
Default: Factory setting
Address: 0416H, 0417H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
The adjustment functions from P4-11 through P4-19 are enabled after parameter
P2-08 is set to 22. Although these parameters allow the users to execute manual
adjustment, we still do not recommend the users to change the default setting
value of these parameters (P4-11 ~ P4-19) manually.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.
P4 - 12
SOF2
Analog Speed Input Drift Adjustment 2
Default: Factory setting
Address: 0418H, 0419H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.
P4 - 13
TOF1
Analog Torque Drift Adjustment 1
Default: Factory setting
Address: 041AH, 041BH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Revision June 2010
7-79
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.
P4 - 14
TOF2
Analog Torque Drift Adjustment 2
Default: Factory setting
Address: 041AH, 041BH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.
P4 - 15
COF1
Current Detector Drift Adjustment (V1
phase)
Default: Factory setting
Address: 041EH, 041FH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.
P4 - 16
COF2
Current Detector Drift Adjustment (V2
phase)
Default: Factory setting
Address: 0420H, 0421H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.
7-80
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P4 - 17
COF3
Current Detector Drift Adjustment (W1
phase)
Default: Factory setting
Address: 0422H, 0423H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.
P4 - 18
COF4
Current Detector Drift Adjustment (W2
phase)
Default: Factory setting
Address: 0424H, 0425H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 0 ~ 32767
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.
P4 - 19
TIGB
IGBT NTC Calibration
Default: Factory setting
Address: 0426H, 0427H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: N/A
Range: 1 ~ 3
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Refer to P4-11 for explanation.
When executing this auto adjustment, please ensure to cool the servo drive to
o
25 C.
Revision June 2010
7-81
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
P4 - 20
DOF1
Analog Monitor Output Drift Adjustment
(CH1)
Address: 0428H, 0429H
Default: Factory setting
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.4.4
Unit: mV
Range: -800 ~ 800
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.
P4 - 21
DOF2
Analog Monitor Output Drift Adjustment
(CH2)
Address: 042AH, 042BH
Default: 0
Related Section:
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Section 6.4.4
Unit: mV
Range: -800 ~ 800
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
Please note that when P2-08 is set to 10, the users cannot reset this parameter.
P4 - 22
SAO
Analog Speed Input Offset
Default: 0
Address: 042CH, 042DH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: S
Unit: mV
Range: -5000 ~ 5000
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
In speed mode, the users can use this parameter to add an offset value to analog
speed input.
P4 - 23
TAO
Analog Torque Input Offset
Default: 0
Address: 042EH, 042FH
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: T
Unit: mV
Range: -5000 ~ 5000
Data Size: 16-bit
7-82
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
In speed mode, the users can use this parameter to add an offset value to analog
speed input.
P4 - 24
LVL
Undervoltage Error Level
Default: 160
Address: 0430H, 0431H
Related Section: N/A
Applicable Control Mode: ALL
Unit: V (rms)
Range: 140 ~ 190
Data Size: 16-bit
Display Format: Decimal
Settings:
When DC Bus voltage is lower than the value of P4-24 x 2 , the fault, Undervoltage
will occur.
Revision June 2010
7-83
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Table 7.A
Input Function Definition
Setting value: 0x01
DI Name
SON
DI Function Description
Servo On. When this DI is activated, it indicates the
servo drive is enabled.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x02
DI Name
DI Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
A number of Faults (Alarms) can be cleared by
activating ARST. Please see table 10-3 for applicable
ARST
faults that can be cleared with the ARST command.
Rising-edge
However, please investigate Fault or Alarm if it does
Triggered
All
not clear or the fault description warrants closer
inspection of the drive system.
Setting value: 0x03
DI Name
DI Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Gain switching in speed and position mode. When
GAINUP
GAINUP is activated (P2-27 is set to 1), the gain is
Level
switched to the gain multiplied by gain switching
Triggered
PT S
rate.
Setting value: 0x04
DI Name
DI Function Description
When CCLR is activated, the setting parameter P2-50
Pulse Clear Mode is executed.
CCLR
0: After CCLR is activated (ON), the position
accumulated pulse number will be cleared
continuously.
7-84
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Rising-edge
Triggered,
Level
PT
Triggered
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Setting value: 0x05
DI Name
DI Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
When this signal is On and the motor speed value is
lower than the setting value of P1-38, it is used to lock
the motor in the instant position while ZCLAMP is On.
Speed
Command
Setting value of
P1-38 (Zero speed)
Level
ZCLAMP
Triggered
ZCLAMP
input signal
OFF
S
ON
Motor Speed
Setting value of
P1-38 (Zero speed)
Time
Setting value: 0x06
DI Name
DI Function Description
Command input reverse control. When the drive is in
CMDINV
the Position, Speed and Torque mode, and CMDINV is
activated, the motor is in reverse rotation.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
S, T
Setting value: 0x07
DI Name
DI Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Reserved
Setting value: 0x09
DI Name
DI Function Description
Torque limit enabled. When the drive is in speed and
position mode, and TRQLM is activated, it indicates
TRQLM
the torque limit command is valid. The torque limit
command source is internal parameter or analog
Level
Triggered
PT, S
voltage.
Revision June 2010
7-85
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Setting value: 0x10
DI Name
DI Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Speed limit enabled. When the drive is in torque
SPDLM
Level
mode and SPDLM is activated, it indicates the speed
limit command is valid. The speed limit command
Triggered
T
source is internal parameter or analog voltage.
Setting value: 0x14 ~ 0x15
DI
Name
DI Function Description
Mode
Speed command selection 0 ~ 1 (Command S1 ~ S4)
DI signal of
Command
Command
CN1
Content
Range
No.
Source
SPD1 SPD0
Voltage
External
between
+/-10 V
S analog
V-REF and
command
SPD0
GND
S1
OFF OFF
Speed
SPD1
Sz None
0
command
is 0
S2
OFF ON
P1-09
-60000
S3
ON OFF
P1-10
Internal
~
parameter
+60000
S4
ON
ON
P1-11
r/min
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
S
Setting value: 0x16 ~ 0x17
DI
Name
DI Function Description
Mode
Torque command selection 0 ~ 1 (Command T1 ~ T4)
DI signal of
Command
Command
CN1
Content Range
No.
Source
TCM1 TCM0
Voltage
Analog
between
T
+/-10 V
V-REF and
command
TCM0
T1
OFF OFF
GND
TCM1
Torque
Tz None
command
0
is 0
T2
OFF
ON
P1-12
Internal
-300 ~
T3
ON
OFF
P1-13
parameter
+300 %
T4
ON
ON
P1-14
7-86
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
T
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Setting value: 0x18
DI Name
S-P
DI Function Description
Speed / Position mode switching.
OFF: Speed mode, ON: Position mode
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
P, S
Setting value: 0x19
DI Name
S-T
DI Function Description
Speed / Torque mode switching.
OFF: Speed mode, ON: Torque mode
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
S, T
Setting value: 0x20
DI Name
T-P
DI Function Description
Torque / Position mode switching.
OFF: Torque mode, ON: Position mode
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
P, T
Setting value: 0x21
DI Name
EMGS
DI Function Description
Emergency stop. It should be contact “b” and
normally ON or a fault (AL013) will display.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x22
DI Name
NL(CWL)
DI Function Description
Reverse inhibit limit. It should be contact “b” and
normally ON or a fault (AL014) will display.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x23
DI Name
PL(CCWL)
Revision June 2010
DI Function Description
Forward inhibit limit. It should be contact “b” and
normally ON or a fault (AL015) will display.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
7-87
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Setting value: 0x25
DI Name
TLLM
DI Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Torque limit - Reverse operation (Torque limit
Level
function is valid only when P1-02 is enabled)
Triggered
PT, S
Setting value: 0x26
DI Name
TRLM
DI Function Description
Torque limit - Forward operation (Torque limit
function is valid only when P1-02 is enabled)
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
PT, S
Setting value: 0x37
DI Name
JOGU
DI Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Forward JOG input. When JOGU is activated, the
Level
motor will JOG in forward direction. [see P4-05]
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x38
DI Name
JOGD
DI Function Description
Reverse JOG input. When JOGD is activated, the motor
will JOG in reverse direction. [see P4-05]
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x43, 0x44
DI Name
DI Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Electronic gear ratio (Numerator) selection 0 ~ 1 [see
P2-60 ~ P2-62]
GNUM0
Level
GNUM1
Triggered
7-88
PT
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Setting value: 0x45
DI Name
DI Function Description
Pulse inhibit input. When the drive is in position
INHP
mode, if INHP is activated, the external pulse input
command is not valid.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
PT
NOTE
1) 11 ~ 17: Single control mode, 18 ~ 20: Dual control mode
2) When P2-10 to P2-17 and P2-36 is set to 0, it indicates input function is disabled.
Revision June 2010
7-89
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Table 7.B
Output Function Definition
Setting value: 0x01
DO Name
DO Function Description
Servo ready. SRDY is activated when the servo drive is
SRDY
ready to run. All fault and alarm conditions, if
present, have been cleared.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x02
DO Name
DO Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
SON is activated when control power is applied the
servo drive. The drive may or may not be ready to run
as a fault / alarm condition may exist.
SON
Servo ON (SON) is "ON" with control power applied to
Level
the servo drive, there may be a fault condition or not.
Triggered
All
The servo is not ready to run. Servo ready (SRDY) is
"ON" where the servo is ready to run, NO fault / alarm
exists.
Setting value: 0x03
DO Name
DO Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
ZSPD is activated when the drive senses the motor is
equal to or below the Zero Speed Range setting as
defined in parameter P1-38.
ZSPD
For Example, at factory default ZSPD will be activated
when the drive detects the motor rotating at speed at
Level
Triggered
All
or below 10 r/min, ZSPD will remain activated until
the motor speed increases above 10 r/min.
7-90
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Setting value: 0x04
DO Name
DO Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
TSPD is activated once the drive has detected the
motor has reached the Target Rotation Speed setting
TSPD
as defined in parameter P1-39. TSPD will remain
activated until the motor speed drops below the
Level
Triggered
All
Target Rotation Speed.
Setting value: 0x05
DO Name
DO Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
1. When the drive is in PT mode, TPOS will be activated
TPOS
when the position error is equal and below the
setting value of P1-54.
Level
Triggered
PT
Setting value: 0x06
DO Name
DO Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
TQL is activated when the drive has detected that the
TQL
motor has reached the torques limits set by either the
parameters P1-12 ~ P1-14 of via an external analog
Level
Triggered
voltage.
All,
except T,
Tz
Setting value: 0x07
DO Name
DO Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
ALRM is activated when the drive has detected a fault
condition. (However, when Reverse limit error,
ALRM
Forward limit error, Emergency stop, Serial
communication error, and Undervoltage these fault
Level
Triggered
All
occur, WARN is activated first.)
Revision June 2010
7-91
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Setting value: 0x08
DO Name
DO Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Electromagnetic brake control. BRKR is activated
(Actuation of motor brake). (Please refer to
parameters P1-42 ~ P1-43)
Level
BRKR
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x10
DO Name
DO Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Output overload warning. OLW is activated when the
servo drive has detected that the motor has reached
the output overload time set by parameter P1-56.
tOL = Permissible Time for Overload x setting value of
P1-56
When overload accumulated time (continuously
overload time) exceeds the value of tOL, the overload
warning signal will output, i.e. DO signal, OLW will be
ON. However, if the accumulated overload time
(continuous overload time) exceeds the permissible
time for overload, the overload alarm (AL006) will
OLW
occur.
For example:
Level
Triggered
All
If the setting value of parameter P1-56 (Output
Overload Warning Time) is 60%, when the permissible
time for overload exceeds 8 seconds at 200% rated
output, the overload fault (AL006) will be detected
and shown on the LED display.
At this time, tOL = 8 x 60% = 4.8 seconds
Result:
When the drive output is at 200% rated output and the
drive is continuously overloaded for 4.8 seconds, the
overload warning signal will be ON (DO code is 0x10,
7-92
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
i.e. DO signal OLW will be activated). If the drive is
continuously overloaded for 8 seconds, the overload
alarm will be detected and shown on the LED display
(AL006). Then, Servo Fault signal will be ON (DO
signal ALRM will be activated).
Setting value: 0x11
DO Name
DO Function Description
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Servo warning activated. WARN is activated when the
WARN
drive has detected Reverse limit error. Forward limit
Level
error, Emergency stop, Serial communication error,
Triggered
All
and Undervoltage these fault conditions.
Setting value: 0x13
DO Name
SNL
(SCWL)
DO Function Description
Reverse software limit. SNL is activated when the
servo drive has detected that reverse software limit is
reached.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x14
DO Name
SPL
(SCCWL)
DO Function Description
Forward software limit. SPL is activated when the
servo drive has detected that forward software limit is
reached.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x19
DO Name
DO Function Description
Speed reached output. SP_OK will be activated when
SP_OK
the speed error is equal and below the setting value of
P1-47.
Revision June 2010
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
S, Sz
7-93
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Setting value: 0x30
DO Name
SDO_0
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit00 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x31
DO Name
SDO_1
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit01 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x32
DO Name
SDO_2
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit02 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x33
DO Name
SDO_3
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit03 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x34
DO Name
SDO_4
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit04 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x35
DO Name
SDO_5
7-94
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit05 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Revision June 2010
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Setting value: 0x36
DO Name
SDO_6
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit06 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x37
DO Name
SDO_7
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit07 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x38
DO Name
SDO_8
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit08 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x39
DO Name
SDO_9
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit09 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x3A
DO Name
SDO_A
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit10 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x3B
DO Name
SDO_B
Revision June 2010
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit11 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
7-95
Chapter 7 Servo Parameters
Setting value: 0x3C
DO Name
SDO_C
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit12 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x3D
DO Name
SDO_D
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit13 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x3E
DO Name
SDO_E
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit14 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
Setting value: 0x3F
DO Name
SDO_F
DO Function Description
Output the status of bit15 of P4-06.
Trigger
Control
Method
Mode
Level
Triggered
All
NOTE
1) When P2-18 to P2-22 and P2-37 is set to 0, it indicates output function is disabled.
7-96
Revision June 2010
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
8.1 Communication Hardware Interface
The ASDA-B2 series servo drive has three modes of communication: RS-232 and RS-485. All
aspects of control, operation and monitoring as well as programming of the controller can be
achieved via communication. The two communication modes can be used at a time. Please
refer to the following sections for connections and limitations.
RS-232
„ Configuration
„ Cable Connection
Revision June 2010
8-1
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
NOTE
1) Recommended maximum cable length is 15m (50ft.). Please note, RFI / EME noise should be
kept to a minimum, communication cable should kept apart from high voltage wires. If a
transmission speed of 38400 bps or greater is required, the maximum length of the
communication cable is 3m (9.84ft.) which will ensure the correct and desired baud rate.
2) The number shown in the pervious figure indicates the terminal number of each connector.
RS-485
„ Configuration
8-2
Revision June 2010
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
„ Cable Connection
NOTE
3) The maximum cable length is 100m (39.37inches) when the servo drive is installed in a
location where there are only a few interferences. Please note, RFI / EME noise should be kept
to a minimum, communication cable should kept apart from high voltage wires. If a
transmission speed of 38400 bps or greater is required, the maximum length of the
communication cable is 15m (50ft.) which will ensure the correct and desired baud rate.
4) The number shown in the pervious figure indicates the terminal number of each connector.
5) The power supply should provide a +12V and higher DC voltage.
6) Please use a REPEATER if more than 32 synchronous axes are required.
7) For the terminal identification of CN3, please refer to Section 3.5.
Revision June 2010
8-3
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
8.2 Communication Parameter Settings
The following describes the communication addresses for the communication parameters.
For communication parameters, please refer to the Chapter 7.
0300H
0301H
Communication
Address Setting
Range: 0x01 ~ 0x7F
Default: 0x7F
Settings (Hexadecimal):
Range
0
0
Y
X
-
-
0~7
0~F
When using RS-232/485 and CANbus communication, this parameter is used set the
communication address in hexadecimal format. If the AC servo drive is controlled by RS232/485 communication, each drive (or device) must be uniquely identified. One servo
drive only can set one address. If the address is duplicate, there will be a communication
fault. This address is an absolute address which represents the servo drive on a RS232/485 or CANbus network. When the address of host (external) controller is set to 0xFF,
it is with auto-respond function. Then, the servo drive will receive from and respond to
host (external) controller both no matter the address is matching or not. However, the
parameter P3-00 cannot be set to 0xFF.
0302H
0303H
Transmission
Speed
Default: 0x0033
Settings (Hexadecimal):
0
Z
Y
X
COM Port
-
-
RS-485
RS-232
Range
0
0
0~5
0~5
Settings:
0: Baud rate
1: Baud rate
2: Baud rate
3: Baud rate
4: Baud rate
5: Baud rate
8-4
4800 (data transmission speed: bits / second)
9600 (data transmission speed: bits / second)
19200 (data transmission speed: bits / second)
38400 (data transmission speed: bits / second)
57600 (data transmission speed: bits / second)
115200 (data transmission speed: bits / second)
Revision June 2010
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
This parameter is used to set the desired transmission speed between the computer and
AC servo drive. Users can set this parameter and control transmission speed to reach the
maximum baud rate of 115200 bps.
0304H
0305H
Communication
Protocol
Default: 0x0066
Settings:
0: Modbus ASCII mode, <7,N,2>
1: Modbus ASCII mode, <7,E,1 >
2: Modbus ASCII mode, <7,O,1>
3: Modbus ASCII mode, <8,N,2 >
4: Modbus ASCII mode, <8,E,1>
5: Modbus ASCII mode, <8,O,1>
6: Modbus RTU mode, <8,N,2>
7: Modbus RTU mode, <8,E,1>
8: Modbus RTU mode, <8,O,1>
This parameter is used to set the communication protocol. The alphanumeric characters
represent the following: 7 or 8 is the number of data bits; N, E or O refer to the parity bit,
Non, Even or Odd; the 1 or 2 is the numbers of stop bits.
0306H
0307H
Transmission
Fault Treatment
Default: 0
Range: 0~1
Settings:
0: Display fault and continue operating
1: Display fault and stop operating
This parameter is used to determine the operating sequence once a communication fault
has been detected. If '1' is selected the drive will stop operating upon detection the
communication fault. The mode of stopping is set by parameter P1-32.
0308H
0309H
Communication
Time Out
Detection
Watch Dog Timer (It is not recommended to change the factory
default setting if not necessary)
Default: 0
Range: 0~20 sec.
The factory default setting is set to 0 and it indicates this function is
disabled.
When this parameter is set to any value over 0, it indicates that the timer is enabled. The
value set in this parameter is the communication time and the communication time out
detection should be completed within the time. Otherwise, a communication error will
occur.
For example, if the value set in this parameter is 5, it indicates that the communication
time out detection will be activated once in five seconds or a communication error will
occur.
030AH
030BH
Communication
Mode
Revision June 2010
Communication selection:
Default: 0
RS-232 communication selects MODBUS or communicates with ASDASoft.
8-5
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
Settings:
0: RS-232
1: RS-485
Multiple communication modes RS232 and RS-485 cannot be used within one
communication ring.
030CH
030DH
Digital Input
Communication
Function
Digital Input Control:
Range:0x0000 ~ 0x01FF
Default: 0
Bit0 ~ Bit 7 corresponds with DI1 ~ DI8. The least significant bit
(Bit0) shows DI1 status and the most significant bit (Bit7) shows
DI8 status.
Bit8 ~ Bit14 corresponds with EDI9 ~ EDI14.
Bit0 ~ Bit8 corresponds with DI1 ~ DI9.
Bit settings:
0: Digital input is controlled by external command.
1: Digital input is controlled by parameter P4-07.
For the settings of DI1 ~ DI8, please refer to P2-10 ~ P2-17.
For the settings of EDI9, please refer to P2-36.
The setting of this parameter determines how the Digital Inputs (DI) accept commands
and signals.
Input commands or signals through the DI can be either from an external source, through
the CN1 interface connector, or via communication (upon software). If this parameter is
set to "0", all commands are external and via CN1; if this parameter is set to
"FFFF"(hexadecimal), all the DI signals are via communication (upon software).
For example, if P3-06 is set to 55 ("binary" display is 01010101), it indicates that Digital
Inputs 1, 3, 5, & 7 are controlled by external commands and Digital Inputs 2, 4, 6, & 8 are
controlled by communication (upon software).
Please see Chapter 4.4.5 DI Signal Display Diagnosis Operation for display layout of the
Digital Signal selection.
The Digital Input Control parameter, P3-06 also works in conjunction with the Digital
Input Status parameter P4-07 which has several functions.
The contents of P4-07 is "read only" via the drive keypad and will display the state on or
off of the eight Digital Inputs which have been set in accordance to P3-06. For Example; if
P3-06 has been set to “FFFF” (All digital inputs are via communication (upon software))
and the P4-07 display is 11 ("binary" display is 00010001), it indicates that the state of
Digital Inputs 1 & 5 are on and the state of Digital Inputs 2, 3, 4, 6, 7 & 8 are off.
030EH
030FH
Communication
Response Delay
Time
8-6
Default: 0
Range: 0~1000
Revision June 2010
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
This parameter is used to delay the communication time that servo drive responds to host
controller (external controller).
When this parameter is set to 0, it indicates that the communication time that servo drive
responds to host controller (external controller) will no be delayed.
Default: 0000
Range: 0~1000
0310H
0311H
Monitor Mode
Byte
-
-
-
H
Function
-
-
-
Monitor
mode
Range
0
0
0
0~3
Setting:
H:
0: Disabled, i.e. disable monitor function.
1: Reserve
2: High-speed monitor mode. The sampling time is 2000 times
per second and 4 channels can be monitored.
3: High-speed monitor mode. The sampling time is 4000 times
per second and 2 channels can be monitored.
This parameter is used to monitor the data of the servo drive via RS-485/232 device. The
monitor data can be displayed on PC upon the data scope function provided by ASDA-B2Soft software.
Revision June 2010
8-7
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
8.3 MODBUS Communication Protocol
When using RS-232/485 serial communication interface, each ASDA-B2 series AC servo drive
has a pre-assigned communication address specified by parameter “P3-00”. The computer
then controls each AC servo drive according to its communication address. ASDA-B2 series AC
servo drive can be set up to communicate on a MODBUS networks using on of the following
modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote Terminal
Unit). Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port communication protocol in
parameter “P3-02”.
„ Code Description:
ASCII Mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data: 64 Hex,
shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
The following table shows the available hexadecimal characters and their corresponding ASCII
codes.
Character
‘0’
‘1’
‘2’
‘3’
‘4’
‘5’
‘6’
‘7’
ASCII code
30H
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
36H
37H
Character
‘8’
‘9’
‘A’
‘B’
‘C’
‘D’
‘E’
‘F’
ASCII code
38H
39H
41H
42H
43H
44H
45H
46H
RTU Mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. For example, a 1-byte
data: 64 Hex.
„ Data Format:
10-bit character frame (For 7-bit character)
7N2
Start
0
1
3
2
bit
4
5
6
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
5
6
Even
parity
Stop
bit
5
6
Odd
parity
Stop
bit
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
7E1
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
7O1
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
8-8
Revision June 2010
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
11-bit character frame (For 8-bit character)
8N2
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
6
7
Even
parity
Stop
bit
6
7
Odd
parity
Stop
bit
8-data bits
11-bits character frame
8E1
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
8-data bits
11-bits character frame
8O1
Start
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
8-data bits
11-bits character frame
„ Communication Protocol:
ASCII Mode:
STX
Start character’: ’ (3AH)
ADR
Communication address: 1-byte consists of 2 ASCII codes
CMD
Command code: 1-byte consists of 2 ASCII codes
DATA(n-1)
…….
Contents of data: n word = n x 2-byte consists of n x 4 ASCII codes,
n≤12
DATA(0)
LRC
Command code: 1-byte consists of 2 ASCII codes
End 1
End code 1: (0DH)(CR)
End 0
End code 0: (0AH)(LF)
RTU Mode:
STX
A silent interval of more than 10ms
ADR
Communication address: 1-byte
CMD
Command code: 1-byte
DATA(n-1)
…….
Contents of data: n word = n x 2-byte, n≤12
DATA(0)
CRC
End 1
Revision June 2010
Command code: 1-byte
A silent interval of more than 10ms
8-9
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
STX (Communication Start)
ASCII Mode: ’:’ character
RTU Mode: A silent interval of more than 10ms
ADR (Communication Address)
The valid communication addresses are in the range of 1 to 254.
For example, communication to AC servo drive with address 16 decimal:
ASCII Mode: ADR=’1’,’0’ => ‘1’=31H,’0’=30H
RTU Mode: ADR = 10H
CMD (Command Codes) and DATA (Data Characters)
The format of data characters depends on the command code. The available command codes
and examples for AC servo drive are described as follows:
Command code: 03H, read N words. The maximum value of N is 10.
For example, reading continuous 2 words from starting address 0200H of AC servo drive with
address 01H.
ASCII Mode:
Command message:
STX
ADR
CMD
Response message:
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
‘0’
Starting data
address
‘2’
‘0’
8-10
CMD
Number of data
(Count by byte)
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
‘0’
‘4'
‘0’
Contents of
starting data
address 0200H
‘0’
‘B’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘1’
‘2’
LRC Check
ADR
‘0’
‘0’
Number of data
STX
‘F’
Contents of
second data
address 0201H
(0DH)(CR)
End 0
(0AH)(LF)
‘4’
‘0’
‘8’
End 1
‘F’
LRC Check
‘E’
‘8’
End 1
(0DH)(CR)
End 0
(0AH)(LF)
Revision June 2010
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
RTU Mode:
Command message:
Response message:
ADR
01H
ADR
01H
CMD
03H
CMD
03H
Starting data
address
02H (Upper bytes)
Number of data
(Count by byte)
04H
Number of data
(Count by word)
00H
02H
CRC Check Low
C5H (Lower bytes)
CRC Check High
B3H (Upper bytes)
00H (Lower bytes)
Contents of
starting data
address 0200H
00H (Upper bytes)
Contents of
second data
address 0201H
1FH (Upper bytes)
40H (Lower bytes)
CRC Check Low
A3H (Lower bytes)
CRC Check High
D4H (Upper bytes)
B1H (Lower bytes)
Command code: 06H, write 1 word
For example, writing 100 (0064H) to starting data address 0200H of ASDA-B2 series with
address 01H.
ASCII Mode:
Command message:
STX
ADR
CMD
Response message:
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘6’
STX
ADR
CMD
‘0’
Starting data
address
Content of data
‘2’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘6’
‘0’
Starting data
address
‘2'
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘6’
Content of data
‘4’
LRC Check
‘:’
‘9’
‘3’
‘0’
‘6’
‘4’
LRC Check
‘9’
‘3’
End 1
(0DH)(CR)
End 1
(0DH)(CR)
End 0
(0AH)(LF)
End 0
(0AH)(LF)
Revision June 2010
8-11
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
RTU Mode:
Command message:
Response message:
ADR
01H
ADR
01H
CMD
06H
CMD
06H
Starting data
address
02H (Upper bytes)
Starting data
address
02H (Upper bytes)
Content of data
00H (Lower bytes)
00H (Upper bytes)
64H (Lower bytes)
Content of data
00H (Lower bytes)
00H (Upper bytes)
64H (Lower bytes)
CRC Check Low
89H (Lower bytes)
CRC Check Low
89H (Lower bytes)
CRC Check High
99H (Upper bytes)
CRC Check High
99H (Upper bytes)
LRC (ASCII Mode):
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, the values
of the bytes from ADR to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal representation
of the 2’s-complement negation of the sum.
For example, reading 1 word from address 0201H of the ASDA-B2 series AC servo drive with
address 01H.
STX
ADR
CMD
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
‘0’
Starting data address
‘2’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
Number of data
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
LRC Check
‘F’
‘8’
End 1
(0DH)(CR)
End 0
(0AH)(LF)
01H+03H+02H+01H+00H+01H = 08H, the 2’s complement negation of 08H is F8H.
Hence, we can know that LRC CHK is ’F’,’8’.
8-12
Revision June 2010
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
CRC (RTU Mode):
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of
the 16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Extract and examine the LSB. If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one
bit to the right. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit to the
right, then Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value A001H.
Step 4: Repeat step 3 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a complete 8bit byte will have been processed, then perform step 5.
Step 5: Repeat step 2 to step 4 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message.
Continue doing this until all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC
register are
the CRC value.
NOTE
1) When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the CRC
value must be swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.
2) For example, reading 2 words from address 0101H of the AC servo drive with address 01H.
The final content of the CRC register from ADR to last data character is 3794H, then the
command message is shown as follows. What should be noticed is that 94H have to be
transmitted before 37H.
Command Message
ADR
01H
CMD
03H
Starting data address
01H (Upper byte)
01H (Lower bytes)
Number of data
(Count by word)
00H (Upper bytes)
CRC Check Low
94H (Lower bytes)
CRC Check High
37H (Upper bytes)
02H (Lower bytes)
End1, End0 (Communication End)
ASCII Mode:
In ASCII mode, (0DH) stands for character ’\r’ (carriage return) and (0AH) stands for
character ’\n’ (new line), they indicate communication end.
Revision June 2010
8-13
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
RTU Mode:
In RTU mode, a silent interval of more than 10ms indicates communication end.
The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two
arguments:
unsigned char* data;
unsigned char length
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length) {
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF;
while( length-- ) {
reg_crc^= *data++;
for (j=0; j<8; j++ ) {
if( reg_crc & 0x01 ) { /*LSB(bit 0 ) = 1 */
reg_crc = (reg_crc >> 1)^0xA001;
} else {
reg_crc = (reg_crc>>1);
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
}
PC communication program example:
#include<stdio.h>
#include<dos.h>
#include<conio.h>
#include<process.h>
#define PORT 0x03F8
/* the address of COM 1 */
#define THR 0x0000
#define RDR 0x0000
#define BRDL 0x0000
#define IER 0x0001
#define BRDH 0x0001
#define LCR 0x0003
#define MCR 0x0004
#define LSR 0x0005
#define MSR 0x0006
8-14
Revision June 2010
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
unsigned char rdat[60];
/* read 2 data from address 0200H of ASD with address 1 */
unsigned char tdat[60]={‘:’,’0’,’1’,’0’,’3’,’0’,’2’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’2’,’F’,’8’,’\r’,’\n’};
void main() {
int I;
outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08);
/* interrupt enable */
outportb(PORT+IER,0x01);
/* interrupt as data in */
outportb(PORT+LCR,( inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80 ) );
/* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7 == 1 */
outportb(PORT+BRDL,12);
outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00);
outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06);
/* set prorocol
<7,E,1> = 1AH,
<7,O,1> = 0AH
<8,N,2> = 07H
<8,E,1> = 1BH
<8,O,1> = 0BH
*/
for( I = 0; I<=16; I++ ) {
while( !(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20) );
/* wait until THR empty */
outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[I]);
/* send data to THR */
}
I = 0;
while( !kbhit() ) {
if( inportb(PORT+LSR)&0x01 ) { /* b0==1, read data ready */
rdat[I++] = inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data from RDR */
}
}
}
Revision June 2010
8-15
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
8.4 Communication Parameter Write-in and Read-out
There are following five groups for parameters:
Group 0: Monitor parameter
(example: P0-xx)
Group 1: Basic parameter
(example: P1-xx)
Group 2: Extension parameter
(example: P2-xx)
Group 3: Communication parameter
(example: P3-xx)
Group 4: Diagnosis parameter
(example: P4-xx)
For a complete listing and description of all parameters, refer to Chapter 7.
Communication write-in parameters for ASDA-B2 series are including:
Group 0: All parameters except P0-00 ~ P0-01, P0-08 ~ P0-13 and P0-46
Group 1: P1-00 ~ P1-76
Group 2: P2-00 ~ P2-67
Group 3: P3-00 ~ P3-11
Group 4: All parameters except P4-00 ~ P4-04 and P4-08 ~ P4-09
NOTE
1) P3-01
After the new transmission speed is set, the next data will be written in new
transmission speed.
2) P3-02
After the new communication protocol is set, the next data will be written in new
communication protocol.
3) P4-05
JOG control of servo motor. For the description, refer to Chapter 7.
4) P4-06
Force output contact control. This parameter is for the users to test if DO (Digit
output) is normal. User can set 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32 to test DO1, DO2, DO3, DO4, DO5,
DO6 respectively. After the test has been completed, please set this parameter to 0
to inform the drive that the test has been completed.
5) P4-10
Adjustment function selection. If the user desires to change the settings of this
parameter, the user has to set the value of the parameter P2-08 to 20 (hexadecimal:
14H) first and then restart. After restarting, the settings of parameter P4-10 can
become modified.
6) P4-11 ~ P4-21
These parameters are for offset adjustment. Do not change the factory
default setting if not necessary. If the user desires to change the settings of
these parameters, the user has to set the value of the parameter P2-08 to 22
(hexadecimal: 16H) first and then restart. After restarting, the settings of
parameters P4-11 to P4-21 can become modified.
8-16
Revision June 2010
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
Communication read-out parameters for ASDA-B2 series are including:
Group 0: P0-00 ~ P0-46
Group 1: P1-00 ~ P1-76
Group 2: P2-00 ~ P2-67
Group 3: P3-00 ~ P3-11
Group 4: P4-00 ~ P4-24
Revision June 2010
8-17
Chapter 8 MODBUS Communications
This page intentionally left blank.
8-18
Revision June 2010
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection
Delta AC servo drives are based on solid state electronics technology. Preventive maintenance
is required to operate this AC servo drives in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life. It
is recommended to perform a periodic maintenance and inspection of the AC servo drive by a
qualified technician. Before any maintenance and inspection, always turn off the AC input
power to the unit.
¾ Be sure to disconnect AC power and ensure that the internal capacitors have fully
discharged before performing the maintenance and inspection!
9.1 Basic Inspection
After power is in connected to the AC servo drive, the charge LED will be lit which indicates
that the AC servo drive is ready.
Item
Content
z Periodically inspect the screws of the servo drive, motor shaft, terminal
block and the connection to mechanical system. Tighten screws as
necessary as they may loosen due to vibration and varying temperatures.
z Ensure that oil, water, metallic particles or any foreign objects do not fall
inside the servo drive, motor, control panel or ventilation slots and
General Inspection
holes. As these will cause damage.
z Ensure the correct installation and the control panel. It should be free
from airborne dust, harmful gases or liquids.
z Ensure that all wiring instructions and recommendations are followed;
otherwise damage to the drive and or motor may result.
z Inspect the servo drive and servo motor to insure they were not
damaged.
z To avoid an electric shock, be sure to connect the ground terminal of
servo drive to the ground terminal of control panel.
z Before making any connection, wait 10 minutes for capacitors to
discharge after the power is disconnected, alternatively, use an
appropriate discharge device to discharge.
Inspection before z Ensure that all wiring terminals are correctly insulated.
operation
z Ensure that all wiring is correct or damage and or malfunction may
(Control power is
result.
not applied)
z Visually check to ensure that there are not any unused screws, metal
strips, or any conductive or inflammable materials inside the drive.
z Never put inflammable objects on servo drive or close to the external
regenerative resistor.
z Make sure control switch is OFF.
z If the electromagnetic brake is being used, ensure that it is correctly
wired.
Revision June 2010
9-1
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection
Item
Content
Inspection before z If required, use an appropriate electrical filter to eliminate noise to the
servo drive.
operation
(Control power is z Ensure that the external applied voltage to the drive is correct and
matched to the controller.
not applied)
z Ensure that the cables are not damaged, stressed excessively or loaded
heavily. When the motor is running, pay close attention on the
connection of the cables and notice that if they are damaged, frayed or
over extended.
z Check for abnormal vibrations and sounds during operation. If the servo
motor is vibrating or there are unusual noises while the motor is
running, please contact the dealer or manufacturer for assistance.
z Ensure that all user-defined parameters are set correctly. Since the
Inspection during
characteristics of various machinery are different, in order to avoid
operation
accident or cause damage, do not adjust the parameter abnormally and
ensure the parameter setting is not an excessive value.
(Control power is
applied))
z Ensure to reset some parameters when the servo drive is off (Please refer
to Chapter 7). Otherwise, it may result in malfunction.
z If there is no contact sound or there be any unusual noises when the
relay of the servo drive is operating, please contact your distributor for
assistance or contact with Delta.
z Check for abnormal conditions of the power indicators and LED display.
If there is any abnormal condition of the power indicators and LED
display, please contact your distributor for assistance or contact with
Delta.
9.2 Maintenance
„ Use and store the product in a proper and normal environment.
„ Periodically clean the surface and panel of servo drive and motor.
„ Make sure the conductors or insulators are corroded and/or damaged.
„ Do not disassemble or damage any mechanical part when performing maintenance.
„ Clean off any dust and dirt with a vacuum cleaner. Place special emphasis on cleaning the
ventilation ports and PCBs. Always keep these areas clean, as accumulation of dust and
dirt can cause unforeseen failures.
9-2
Revision June 2010
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection
9.3 Life of Replacement Components
„ Smooth capacitor
The characteristics of smooth capacitor would be deteriorated by ripple current
affection. The life of smooth capacitor varies according to ambient temperature and
operating conditions. The common guaranteed life of smooth capacitor is ten years
when it is properly used in normal air-conditioned environment.
„ Relay
The contacts will wear and result in malfunction due to switching current. The life of
relay varies according to power supply capacity. Therefore, the common guaranteed life
of relay is cumulative 100,000 times of power on and power off.
„ Cooling fan
The cooling fan life is limited and should be changed periodically. The cooling fan will
reach the end of its life in 2~3 years when it is in continuous operation. However, it also
must be replaced if the cooling fan is vibrating or there are unusual noises.
Revision June 2010
9-3
Chapter 9 Maintenance and Inspection
This page intentionally left blank.
9-4
Revision June 2010
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
If a fault is detected on the servo drive or motor a corresponding fault code will be shown on
the drive's LED display. Fault codes can also be transmitted via communication, see P0-01 and
P4-00 ~ P4-04 for display on controller or HMI.
10.1 Fault Messages Table
Servo Drive Fault Messages
Fault Messages
Display
Revision June 2010
Fault Name
Fault Description
Overcurrent
Main circuit current is higher than 1.5 multiple of
motor’s instantaneous maximum current value.
Overvoltage
Main circuit voltage has exceeded its maximum
allowable value.
Undervoltage
Main circuit voltage is below its minimum specified
value.
Motor error
The motor does not match the drive. They are not
correctly matched for size (power rating).
Regeneration error
Regeneration control operation is in error.
Overload
Servo motor and drive is overload.
Overspeed
Motor’s control speed exceeds the limit of normal
speed.
Abnormal pulse
control command
Input frequency of pulse command exceeds the limit of
its allowable setting value.
Excessive deviation
Position control deviation value exceeds the limit of its
allowable setting value.
Reserve
Reserve
Encoder error
Pulse signal is in error.
Adjustment error
Adjusted value exceeds the limit of its allowable setting
value when perform electrical adjustment.
Emergency stop
activated
Emergency stop switch is activated.
Reverse limit switch
error
Reverse limit switch is activated.
Forward limit switch
error
Forward limit switch is activated.
10-1
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
Fault Messages
Display
Fault Name
Fault Description
IGBT temperature
error
The temperature of IGBT is over high.
Memory error
EE-PROM write-in and read-out is in error.
Encoder output error
The encoder output exceeds the rated output
frequency.
Serial communication
RS232/485 communication is in error.
error
Serial communication
RS232/485 communication time out.
time out
Reserve
Reserve
Input power phase
loss
One phase of the input power is loss.
To warn that the servo motor and drive is going to
overload. This alarm will display before ALM06. When
the servo motor reach the setting value of P1-56, the
Pre-overload warning
motor will send a warning to the drive. After the drive
has detected the warning, the DO signal OLW will be
activated and this fault message will display.
Encoder initial
magnetic field error
The magnetic field of the encoder U, V, W signal is in
error.
Encoder internal
error
The internal memory of the encoder is in error. An
internal counter error is detected.
Encoder data error
An encoder data error is detected for three times.
Motor protection
error
In order to protect the motor, this alarm will be
activated when the setting value of P1-57 is reached
after a period of time set by P1-58.
U,V,W wiring error
The wiring connections of U, V, W (for servo motor
output) and GND (for grounding) are in error.
DSP firmware
upgrade
EE-PROM is not reset after the firmware version is
upgraded.
This fault can be cleared after setting P2-08 to 30 first,
and then setting P2-08 to 28 next and restarting the
servo drive.
NOTE
1) If there is any unknown fault code that is not listed on the above table, please inform the
distributor or contact with Delta for assistance.
10-2
Revision June 2010
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
10.2 Potential Cause and Corrective Actions
Servo Drive Fault Messages
: Overcurrent
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
Short-circuit at drive
output (U, V, W)
1. Check the wiring connections between Repair the short-circuited and
drive and motor.
avoid metal conductor being
exposed.
2. Check if the wire is short-circuited.
Motor wiring error
Check if the wiring steps are all correct
when connecting motor to drive.
Follow the wiring steps in the
user manual to reconnect
wiring.
IGBT error
Heat sink overheated
Please contact your distributor
for assistance or contact with
Delta.
Control parameter
setting error
Check if the setting value exceeds the
factory default setting.
Set the setting back to factory
default setting and then reset
and adjust the parameter
setting again.
Control command
setting error
Check if the control input command is
unstable (too much fluctuation).
1. Ensure that input command
frequency is stable (too
much fluctuation).
2. Activate filter function.
: Overvoltage
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
The main circuit
voltage has
Use voltmeter to check whether the input
Use correct power supply or
exceeded its
voltage falls within the rated input
stabilizing power.
maximum allowable voltage.
value.
Input power error
(Incorrect power
input)
Use voltmeter to check whether the input Use correct power supply or
voltage is within the specified limit.
stabilizing power.
: Undervoltage
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
The main circuit
voltage is below its
minimum specified
value.
Check whether the wiring of main circuit
Reconfirm voltage wiring.
input voltage is normal.
No input voltage at
main circuit.
Use voltmeter to check whether input
voltage at main circuit is normal.
Input power error
(Incorrect power
input)
Use voltmeter to check whether the input Use correct power supply or
voltage is within the specified limit.
serial stabilizing power.
Revision June 2010
Reconfirm power switch.
10-3
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
: Motor error
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
Encoder is damage. Check Encoder for the damage.
Repair or replace the motor.
Encoder is loose.
Examine the Encoder connector.
Install the motor again.
The type of the
servo motor is
incorrect.
Check if the servo drive and servo motor Replace the motor.
are not correctly matched for size (power
rating).
: Regeneration error
Potential Cause
Regenerative
resistor is not
connected.
Checking Method
Check the wiring connection of
regenerative resistor.
Corrective Actions
Reconnect regenerative
resistor.
Please contact your distributor
Regenerative switch Check if regenerative switch transistor is
for assistance or contact with
transistor fault
short-circuited.
Delta.
Parameter setting is Confirm the parameter setting and
in error
specifications of regenerative resistor.
Correctly reset parameter
again.
: Overload
Potential Cause
The drive has
exceeded its rated
load during
continuous
operation.
Checking Method
Check if the drive is overloaded.
Check if there is mechanical vibration
Control system
parameter setting is
incorrect.
Accel/Decel time setting is too fast.
The wiring of drive
and encoder is in
error.
Corrective Actions
Increase motor capacity or
reduce load.
Adjust gain value of control
circuit.
Decrease Accel/Decel time
setting.
Check the wiring of U, V, W and encoder. Ensure all wiring is correct.
: Overspeed
Potential Cause
Speed input
command is not
stable (too much
fluctuation).
Checking Method
Use signal detector to detect if input
signal is abnormal.
Over-speed
Check if over-speed parameter setting
parameter setting is
value is too low.
defective.
10-4
Corrective Actions
Ensure that input command
frequency is stable (not
fluctuate too much) and
activate filter function (P1-06,
P1-07 and P1-08).
Correctly set over-speed
parameter setting (P2-34).
Revision June 2010
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
: Abnormal pulse control command
Potential Cause
Pulse command
frequency is higher
than rated input
frequency.
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
Use pulse frequency detector to measure Correctly set the input pulse
input frequency.
frequency.
: Excessive deviation
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
Check the maximum deviation
Maximum deviation
parameter setting and observe the
parameter setting is
position error value when the motor is
too small.
running.
Increases the parameter
setting value of P2-35.
Gain value is too
small.
Check for proper gain value.
Correctly adjust gain value.
Torque limit is too
low.
Check torque limit value.
Correctly adjust torque limit
value.
There is an overload. Check for overload condition.
Reduce external applied load
or re-estimate the motor
capacity.
: Reserve
: Encoder error (Position detector fault)
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
1. Check if all wiring is correct.
The wiring of encoder 2. Check if the users conduct the
Ensure all wiring is correct.
is in error.
wiring by the wiring information in
the user manual.
Encoder is loose
Examine the encoder connector.
Install the motor again.
The wiring of encoder
Check if all connections are tight.
is defective.
Conduct the wiring again.
Encoder is damage
Repair or replace the motor.
Check the encoder for the damage.
: Adjustment error
Potential Cause
1.
The setting value of
drift adjustment has
2.
exceeded its maximum
allowable value.
Revision June 2010
Checking Method
Remove CN1 wiring.
Execute the drift adjustment again.
(Set P2-08 to 20 first, and then set
P4-10 to 5.)
Corrective Actions
If the error does not clear
after executing the drift
adjustment again, please
contact your distributor for
assistance or contact with
Delta.
10-5
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
: Emergency stop activated
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
Emergency stop switch Check if emergency stop switch is On Activate emergency stop
is activated.
or Off.
switch.
: Reverse (CWL) limit switch error
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
Reverse limit switch is Check if reverse limit switch is On or
activated.
Off.
Activate reverse limit switch.
Servo system is not
stable.
Modify parameter setting and
re-estimate motor capacity.
Check the value of control parameter
setting and load inertia.
: Forward (CCWL) limit switch error
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
Forward limit switch is Check if forward limit switch is On or
activated.
Off.
Activate forward limit switch.
Servo system is not
stable.
Modify parameter setting and
re-estimate motor capacity.
Check the value of control parameter
setting and load inertia.
: IGBT temperature error
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
The drive has
exceeded its rated
Check if there is overload or the motor Increase motor capacity or
load during
current is too high.
reduce load.
continuous operation.
Short-circuit at drive
output.
Check the drive input wiring.
Ensure all wiring is correct.
: Memory error
Potential Cause
Parameter data error
when writing into EEPROM.
10-6
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
1.If this fault occurs when
power is applied to the
Examine the parameter settings.
drive, it indicates that the
Please do the following steps:
setting value of one
1.Press SHIFT key on the drive keypad,
parameter has exceeded the
and examine the parameter shown
specified range. Correct the
on LED display.
setting value of the
2.If E320A is displayed (in
parameter to clear the fault
hexadecimal format), it indicates it is and restart the servo drive.
parameter P2-10. Please examine the
2.If this fault occurs during
parameter settings of P2-10.
normal operation, it
3.If E3610 is displayed (in hexadecimal indicates that the error
format), it indicates it is parameter
occurs when writing data
P6-16. Please examine the parameter into EE-PROM. Turn ARST (DI
settings of P6-16.
signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.
Revision June 2010
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
Potential Cause
Checking Method
The setting value of
Press SHIFT key on the drive keypad
hidden parameter is in and examine if E100X is displayed on
error.
LED display.
Data in EE-PROM is
damaged.
Press SHIFT key on the drive keypad
and examine if E0001 is displayed on
LED display.
Corrective Actions
If this fault occurs when
resetting the parameter
settings, it indicates that the
servo drive type is not set
correctly. Correctly set the
servo drive type again.
If this fault occurs when power
is applied to the drive, it
indicates that the data in EERPM is damaged or there is no
data in EE-PROM. Please
contact your distributor for
assistance or contact with
Delta.
: Encoder output error
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Check if the recent fault records (P4Encoder itself or the
00 ~ P4-05) display on the drive
wiring of encoder is in keypad in accordance with the fault
error.
codes AL011, AL024, AL025 and
AL026.
Corrective Actions
Perform the corrective actions
as described in AL011, AL024,
AL025 and AL026.
Correctly set P1-76 and P1-46.
Check if the following conditions
1.Ensure that the motor speed
The output frequency occur:
is below the value set by P1for pulse output may Condition 1: Motor speed is above the
76.
exceed the limit of its value set by P1-76.
allowable setting
2.
Condition 2:
value.
Motor Speed
6
Motor Speed
60
× P1 − 46 × 4 > 19.8 × 10
60
× P1 − 46 × 4 < 19.8 × 106
: Serial communication error
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
Communication
parameter setting is
defective.
Check the communication parameter Correctly set parameter
setting.
setting.
Communication
address is incorrect.
Check the communication address.
Correctly set communication
address.
Communication
is incorrect.
Check the communication value.
Correctly set communication
value.
Revision June 2010
value
10-7
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
: Serial communication time out
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
Setting value in time
out parameter is not
correct.
Check communication time out
parameter setting.
Not receiving
communication
command for a long
time.
Tighten the communication
cable, make sure the
Check whether communication cable is
communication cable is not
loose or broken.
damaged and ensure all wiring
is correct.
Correctly set P3-07.
: Reserve
: Input power phase loss
Potential Cause
Control power supply
is in error.
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
Check the power cable and
connections of R, S, T. Check whether
the power cable is loose or the
possible loss of phase on input power.
If the fault does not clear even
when the three-phase power is
connected correctly, please
contact your distributor for
assistance or contact with
Delta.
: Pre-overload warning
Potential Cause
The drive is going to
overload.
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
1. Please refer to the
1. Check the load condition of the
correction actions of
servo motor and drive.
ALE06.
2. Check the setting value of P1-56.
2. Increase the setting value
Check whether the setting value of
of P1-56 or set P1-56 to
P1-56 is to small.
100 and above.
: Encoder initial magnetic field error
Potential Cause
The magnetic field of
the encoder U, V, W
signal is in error.
10-8
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
1.Check if the servo motor is properly
grounded.
2.Check if the encoder signal cables
are placed in separate conduits from
the cables connected to R, S, T and
U, V, W terminals to prevent the
interference.
3.Check if the shielded cables are used
when performing encoder wiring.
If the error does not clear after
each checking is done, please
contact your distributor for
assistance or contact with
Delta.
Revision June 2010
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
: Encoder internal error
Potential Cause
The internal memory
of the encoder is in
error. An encoder
counter error occurs.
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
1.Please connect the
grounding (green color) of
U, V, W terminal to the
heatsink of the servo drive.
1.Check if the servo motor is properly 2.Ensure that the encoder
signal cables are placed in
grounded.
separate conduits from the
2.Check if the encoder signal cables
cables connected to R, S, T
are placed in separate conduits from
and U, V, W terminals to
the cables connected to R, S, T and
prevent the interference.
U, V, W terminals to prevent the
3.Please use shielded cables
interference.
for Encoder wiring.
3.Check if the shielded cables are used
4.If the error does not clear
when performing encoder wiring.
after all the above actions
are done, please contact
your distributor for
assistance or contact with
Delta.
: Encoder data error
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
1.Please connect the
grounding (green color) of
U, V, W terminal to the
heatsink of the servo drive.
1.Check if the servo motor is properly 2.Ensure that the encoder
signal cables are placed in
grounded.
separate conduits from the
2.Check if the encoder signal cables
cables connected to R, S, T
are placed in separate conduits from
and U, V, W terminals to
An encoder data error
the cables connected to R, S, T and
prevent the interference.
occurs for three times. U, V, W terminals to prevent the
3.Please use shielded cables
interference.
for Encoder wiring.
3.Check if the shielded cables are used
4.If the error does not clear
when performing encoder wiring.
after all the above actions
are done, please contact
your distributor for
assistance or contact with
Delta.
Revision June 2010
10-9
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
: Motor protection error
Potential Cause
Checking Method
The setting value of
1.Check if P1-57 is enabled.
parameter P1-57 is
reached after a period 2.Check if the setting values of P1-57
of time set by
and P1-58 are both too small.
parameter P1-58.
Corrective Actions
1.Set P1-57 to 0.
2.Correctly set P1-57 and P158. Please note that the
over-low setting may results
in malfunction, but overhigh setting may let the
motor protection function
not operate.
: U,V,W wiring error
Potential Cause
Checking Method
Corrective Actions
The wiring connections
Follow the wiring steps in the
of U, V, W (for servo
Check if wiring connections of U, V, W user manual to reconnect the
motor output) and
are not correct.
wiring and ground the servo
GND (for grounding)
drive and motor properly.
are in error.
: DSP firmware upgrade
Potential Cause
EE-PROM is not reset
after the firmware
version is upgraded.
10-10
Checking Method
Check if EE-PROM is reset after the
firmware version is upgraded.
Corrective Actions
Set P2-08 to 30 first, and then
28 next, and restart the servo
drive.
Revision June 2010
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
10.3 Clearing Faults
Display
Revision June 2010
Fault Name
Clearing Method
Overcurrent
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.
Overvoltage
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.
Undervoltage
This fault message can be removed
automatically after the voltage has
returned within its specification.
Motor error
This fault message can be removed by
restarting the servo drive.
Regeneration error
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.
Overload
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.
Overspeed
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.
Abnormal pulse control
command
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.
Excessive deviation
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.
Watch dog execution
time out
This fault message cannot be cleared.
Encoder error
This fault message can be removed by
restarting the servo drive.
Adjustment error
This fault message can be removed after
the wiring of CN1 connector (I/O signal
connector) is removed and auto
adjustment function is executed.
Emergency stop
activated
This fault message can be removed
automatically by turning off EMGS (DI
signal).
Reverse limit switch
error
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault.
This fault message can be removed when
the servo drive is Off (Servo Off)
Forward limit switch
error
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault.
This fault message can be removed when
the servo drive is Off (Servo Off)
IGBT temperature error
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.
Memory error
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.
Encoder output error
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault.
10-11
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
Display
10-12
Fault Name
Clearing Method
Serial communication
error
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault.
This fault message can also be removed
automatically after the communication is
normal.
Serial communication
time out
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.
Command write-in error
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.
Input power phase loss
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault.
This fault message can be removed
automatically after input power phase lost
problem is solved.
Pre-overload warning
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault
or restart the servo drive.
Encoder initial magnetic
field error
This fault message can be removed by
restarting the servo drive.
Encoder internal error
This fault message can be removed by
restarting the servo drive.
Encoder data error
This fault message can be removed by
restarting the servo drive.
Motor protection error
Turn ARST (DI signal) ON to clear the fault.
U,V,W wiring error
This fault message can be removed by
restarting the servo drive.
DSP firmware upgrade
This fault message can be removed after
setting P2-08 to 30 first, and then 28 next
and restarting the servo drive.
Revision June 2010
Chapter 11 Specifications
11.1 Specifications of Servo Drive (ASDA-B2 Series)
Power
supply
Model: ASD-B2 Series
Phase / Voltage
Continuous output current
Cooling System
Position Control Mode
200W
400W
750W
1kW
1.5kW
2kW
3kW
01
02
04
07
10
15
20
30
Three-phase: 170 ~ 255VAC, 50/60Hz ±5%
Single-phase: 200 ~ 255VAC, 50/60Hz ±5%
0.9
Arms
1.55
Arms
2.6
Arms
5.1
Arms
7.3
Arms
8.3
Arms
Natural Air Circulation
Three-phase:
170 ~ 255VAC,
50/60Hz ±5%
13.4
Arms
19.4
Arms
Fan Cooling
Encoder Resolution /
Feedback Resolution
17-bit (160000 p/rev)
Control of Main Circuit
SVPWM Control
Tuning Modes
Auto / Manual
Dynamic Brake
Speed Control Mode
100W
-
Built-in
Max. Input Pulse Frequency
Line driver: Max. 500Kpps (low speed)/ Max.4Mpps(high speed)
Open collector: Max. 200Kpps
Pulse Type
Pulse + Direction, A phase + B phase, CCW pulse + CW pulse
Command Source
External pulse train / Internal parameters
Smoothing Strategy
Low-pass filter
Electronic Gear
Electronic gear N/M multiple
N: 1 ~ (226-1)/M:1 ~ (231-1)
1/50 < N/M < 25600
Torque Limit Operation
Set by parameters
Feed Forward
Compensation
Voltage
Range
Analog Input
Input
Command
Resistance
Time
Constant
Speed Control Range*1
Set by parameters
0 ~ ±10 VDC
10KΩ
2.2 us
1:5000
Command Source
External analog signal / Internal parameters
Smoothing Strategy
Low-pass and S-curve filter
Torque Limit Operation
Set by parameters or via Analog input
Responsiveness
Characteristic
Maximum 550Hz
Speed Fluctuation Rate*2
(at rated speed)
0.01% or less at load fluctuation 0 to 100%
0.01% or less at power fluctuation ±10%
o
o
0.01% or less at ambient temperature fluctuation 0 C to 50 C
Revision June 2010
11-1
Chapter 11 Specifications
Torque Control Mode
Model: ASD-B2 Series
Analog Input
Command
100W
200W
400W
750W
1kW
1.5kW
2kW
3kW
01
02
04
07
10
15
20
30
Voltage Range
0 ~ ±10 VDC
Input
Resistance
10KΩ
Time Constant
2.2 us
Command Source
External analog signal / Internal parameters
Smoothing Strategy
Low-pass filter
Speed Limit Operation
Parameter Setting or via Analog input
Analog Monitor Output
Inputs
Digital
Inputs/Outputs
Monitor signal can set by parameters (Output voltage range: ±8V)
Servo On, Reset, Gain switching, Pulse clear, Zero speed CLAMP,
Command input reverse control, Speed/Torque limit enabled,
Speed command selection, Position / Speed mode switching, Speed
/ Torque mode switching, Torque / Position mode switching,
Emergency stop, Forward / Reverse inhibit limit, Forward / Reverse
operation torque limit, Forward / Reverse JOG input, Electronic gear
ratio (Numerator) selection and Pulse inhibit input
Encoder signal output (A, B, Z Line Driver / Z Open collector)
Outputs
Servo ready, Servo On, At Zero speed, At Speed reached, At
Positioning completed, At Torques limit, Servo alarm (Servo fault)
activated, Electromagnetic brake control, Output overload warning,
Servo warning activated
Protective Functions
Overcurrent, Overvoltage, Undervoltage, Motor overheated,
Overload, Overspeed, Excessive deviation, Regeneration error,
Abnormal pulse control command, Encoder error, Adjustment
error, Emergency stop activated, Reverse/ Forward limit switch
error, IGBT temperature error, Serial communication error, Input
power phase loss, Serial communication time out, terminals with
short circuit protection (U, V ,W , CN1, CN2, CN3 terminals)
Communication Interface
RS-232/RS-485
Installation Site
Indoor location (free from direct sunlight), no corrosive liquid and
gas (far away from oil mist, flammable gas, dust)
Altitude
Altitude 1000m or lower above sea level
Atmospheric pressure
86kPa to 106kPa
Environment
o
o
Operating Temperature
0 C to 55 C (32°F to 131°F) (If operating temperature is above
specified range, forced cooling will be required)
Storage Temperature
-20℃ ~ 65℃
Humidity
0 to 90% (non-condensing)
2
2
Vibration
9.80665m/s (1G) less than 20Hz, 5.88m/ s (0.6G) 20 to 50Hz
IP Rating
IP20
Power System
TN System *4
IEC/EN 61800-5-1, UL 508C
Standards/Requirement
11-2
Revision June 2010
Chapter 11 Specifications
Footnote:
*1
Rated rotation speed: When full load, speed ratio is defined as the minimum speed (the motor
will not pause).
*2
When command is rated rotation speed, the speed fluctuation rate is defined as:
(Empty load rotation speed – Full load rotation speed) / Rated rotation speed
*3
TN system: A power distribution system having one point directly earthed, the exposed
conductive parts of the installation being connected to that points by protective earth
conductor.
*4
Please refer to “Chart of load and operating time” in section 11.4 “Overload Characteristics”.
Revision June 2010
11-3
Chapter 11 Specifications
11.2 Specifications of Servo Motor (ECMA Series)
Low Inertia Servo Motor
Model: ECMA Series
C204
C206
C208
C209
C210
01
02
04
04
07
07
10
10
20
Rated output power (kW)
0.1
0.2
0.4
0.4
0.75
0.75
1.0
1.0
2.0
Rated torque (N-m) *1
0.32
0.64
1.27
1.27
2.39
2.38
3.18
3.18
6.37
Maximum torque (N-m)
0.96
1.92
3.82
3.82
7.16
7.14
8.78
9.54
19.11
Rated speed (r/min)
3000
Maximum speed (r/min)
5000
3000
5000
Rated current (A)
0.90
1.55
2.60
2.60
5.10
3.66
4.25
7.30
12.05
Maximum current (A)
2.70
4.65
7.80
7.74
15.3
11
12.37
21.9
36.15
22.4
57.6
22.1
48.4
29.6
38.6
38.1
90.6
0.177
0.277
0.68
1.13
1.93
2.62
2.65
4.45
0.80
0.53
0.73
0.62
1.72
1.20
0.74
0.61
0.41
0.49
0.49
0.47
0.65
0.75
0.43
0.53
16.0
17.4
18.5
17.2
27.5
24.2
16.8
19.2
2.79
1.55
0.93
0.42
1.34
0.897
0.20
0.13
Power rating (kW/s)
27.7
(without brake)
Rotor moment of inertia
0.037
(× 10-4kg.m2) (without
brake)
Mechanical time constant
0.75
(ms) (without brake)
Torque constant-KT
0.36
(N-m/A)
Voltage constant-KE
13.6
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance
9.30
(Ohm)
Armature inductance (mH)
24.0
12.07
6.71
7.39
3.53
7.55
5.7
1.81
1.50
Electrical time constant
(ms)
2.58
4.30
4.30
7.96
8.36
5.66
6.35
9.30
11.4
Insulation class
Class A (UL), Class B (CE)
Insulation resistance
>100MΩ, DC 500V
Insulation strength
1500V AC, 60 seconds
Weight (kg) (without
brake)
0.5
1.2
1.6
2.1
3.0
2.9
3.8
4.3
6.2
Weight (kg) (with brake)
0.8
1.5
2.0
2.9
3.8
3.69
5.5
4.7
7.2
Max. radial shaft load (N)
78.4
196
196
245
245
245
245
490
490
Max. thrust shaft load (N)
39.2
68
68
98
98
98
98
98
98
25.6
21.3
53.8
22.1
48.4
29.3
37.9
30.4
82.0
0.04
0.192
0.30
0.73
1.18
1.95
2.67
3.33
4.95
0.81
0.85
0.57
0.78
0.65
1.74
1.22
0.93
0.66
0.3
1.3
1.3
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
8.0
8.0
7.2
6.5
6.5
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
18.5
18.5
Power rating (kW/s)
(with brake)
Rotor moment of inertia
(× 10-4kg.m2) (with brake)
Mechanical time constant
(ms) (with brake)
Brake holding torque
[Nt-m (min)]
Brake power consumption
o
(at 20 C) [W]
11-4
Revision June 2010
Chapter 11 Specifications
Model: ECMA Series
Brake release time
[ms (Max)]
Brake pull-in time
[ms (Max)]
C204
C206
C208
C209
C210
01
02
04
04
07
07
10
10
20
5
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
25
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
Vibration grade (um)
15
Operating temperature
0 ~ 40 oC
Storage temperature
-10 ~ 80 oC
Operating humidity
20% to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Storage humidity
20% to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Vibration capacity
2.5G
IP rating
IP65 (when waterproof connectors are used, or when an oil seal is used to
be fitted to the rotating shaft (an oil seal model is used))
Approvals
Footnote:
*1
Rate torque values are continuous permissible values at 0~40oC ambient temperature when
attaching with the sizes of heatsinks listed below:
ECMA-__04 / 06 / 08 : 250mm x 250mm x 6mm
ECMA-__10 : 300mm x 300mm x 12mm
ECMA-__13 : 400mm x 400mm x 20mm
ECMA-__18 : 550mm x 550mm x 30mm
Material type : Aluminum – F40, F60, F80, F100, F130, F180
*2
For the specifications of the motors with rotary magnetic encoders, please refer to the
specifications of the corresponding standard models.
NOTE
1) Please refer to Section 1.2 for details about the model explanation.
Revision June 2010
11-5
Chapter 11 Specifications
Medium / High Inertia Servo Motor
Model: ECMA Series
E213
E218
F218
G213
05
10
15
20
20
30
30
03
06
09
Rated output power (kW)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
3.0
3.0
0.3
0.6
0.9
Rated torque (N-m) *1
2.39
4.77
7.16
9.55
9.55
14.32 19.10
2.86
5.73
8.59
Maximum torque (N-m)
7.16
14.32 21.48 28.65 28.65 42.97 57.29
8.59
Rated speed (r/min)
2000
Maximum speed (r/min)
1500
2000
2.9
5.6
8.3
Maximum current (A)
8.7
16.8
24.81
33.0
7.0
27.1
45.9
62.5
8.17
8.41
1.91
1.51
1.11
0.96
1.62
1.06
0.83
0.85
0.87
0.87
0.85
30.9
31.9
31.8
31.8
31.4
0.57
0.47
0.26
7.39
5.99
4.01
(without brake)
Rotor moment of inertia
(× 10-4kg.m2)
Mechanical time constant
(ms)
Torque constant-KT
(N-m/A)
Voltage constant-KE
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance
(Ohm)
Armature inductance
(mH)
Electrical time constant
(ms)
1000
3000
Rated current (A)
Power rating (kW/s)
11.01 11.22
16.1
19.4
2.5
4.8
7.5
33.66
48.3
58.2
7.44
14.49
22.5
26.3
37.3
66.4
10.0
39.0
66.0
8.17
8.41
11.18
1.28
1.84
1.40
1.07
0.89
0.98
1.15
1.19
1.15
32.0
35.0
42.5
43.8
41.6
1.06
0.82
0.43
11.18 14.59 34.68 54.95 54.95
0.174 0.119 0.052 0.077
2.76
17.19 21.48
2.84
1.38
1.27
14.29 11.12
6.97
12.96 12.88 15.31 15.86 23.87 26.39 16.51 13.55 13.55 16.06
Insulation class
Class A (UL), Class B (CE)
Insulation resistance
>100MΩ, DC 500V
Insulation strength
AC 1500V,60 sec
Weight (kg) (without
brake)
6.8
7.0
7.5
7.8
13.5
18.5
18.5
6.8
7.0
7.5
Weight (kg) (with brake)
8.2
8.4
8.9
9.2
17.5
22.5
22.5
8.2
8.4
8.9
Max. radial shaft load (N)
490
490
490
490
1176
1470
1470
490
490
490
Max. thrust shaft load (N)
98
98
98
98
490
490
490
98
98
98
6.4
24.9
43.1
59.7
24.1
35.9
63.9
9.2
35.9
62.1
8.94
9.14
8.94
9.14
11.9
2.07
1.64
1.19
1.05
1.77
1.10
1.33
2.0
1.51
1.13
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
25.0
25.0
25.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
19.0
19.0
19.0
19.0
20.4
20.4
20.4
19.0
19.0
19.0
Power rating (kW/s)
(with brake)
Rotor moment of inertia
(× 10-4kg.m2) (with brake)
Mechanical time constant
(ms) (with brake)
Brake holding torque
[Nt-m (min)]
Brake power
consumption
o
(at 20 C) [W]
11-6
11.90 15.88 37.86 57.06 57.06
Revision June 2010
Chapter 11 Specifications
Model: ECMA Series
Brake release time
[ms (Max)]
Brake pull-in time
[ms (Max)]
E213
E218
F218
05
10
15
20
20
30
30
03
06
09
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
70
Vibration grade (um)
15
Operating temperature
0 ~ 40 oC
Storage temperature
-10 ~ 80 oC
Operating humidity
20% to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Storage humidity
20% to 90% RH (non-condensing)
Vibration capacity
2.5G
IP rating
G213
IP65 (when waterproof connectors are used, or when an oil seal is used to
be fitted to the rotating shaft (an oil seal model is used))
Approvals
Footnote:
*1
Rate torque values are continuous permissible values at 0~40oC ambient temperature when
attaching with the sizes of heatsinks listed below:
ECMA-__04 / 06 / 08 : 250mm x 250mm x 6mm
ECMA-__10 : 300mm x 300mm x 12mm
ECMA-__13 : 400mm x 400mm x 20mm
ECMA-__18 : 550mm x 550mm x 30mm
Material type : Aluminum – F40, F60, F80, F100, F130, F180
*2
For the specifications of the motors with rotary magnetic encoders, please refer to the
specifications of the corresponding standard models.
NOTE
1) Please refer to Section 1.2 for details about the model explanation.
Revision June 2010
11-7
Chapter 11 Specifications
11.3 Servo Motor Speed-Torque Curves
11-8
Revision June 2010
Chapter 11 Specifications
11.4 Overload Characteristics
„ Overload Protection Function
Overload protection is a built-in protective function to prevent a motor from overheating.
„ Occasion of Overload
1. Motor was operated for several seconds under a torque exceeding 100% torque.
2. Motor had driven high inertia machine and had accelerated and decelerated at high
frequency.
3. Motor UVW cable or encoder cable was not connected correctly.
4. Servo gain was not set properly and caused motor hunting.
5. Motor holding brake was not released.
„ Chart of load and operating time
Low Inertia Series (ECMA C2 Series)
Revision June 2010
11-9
Chapter 11 Specifications
Medium and Medium-High Inertia Series (ECMA E2, F2 Series)
High Inertia Series (ECMA G2/GM Series)
11-10
Revision June 2010
Chapter 11 Specifications
11.5 Dimensions of Servo Drive
Order P/N: ASD-B2-0121;ASD-B2-0221;ASD-B2-0421(100W ~ 400W)
WEIGHT
1.07 (2.36)
NOTE
1) Dimensions are in millimeters (inches).
2) Weights are in kilograms (kg) and (pounds (lbs)).
3) In this manual, actual measured values are in metric units. Dimensions in (imperial units)
are for reference only. Please use metric for precise measurements.
Revision June 2010
11-11
Chapter 11 Specifications
Order P/N:ASD-B2-0721(750W)
WEIGHT
1.54 (3.40)
NOTE
1) Dimensions are in millimeters (inches).
2) Weights are in kilograms (kg) and (pounds (lbs)).
3) In this manual, actual measured values are in metric units. Dimensions in (imperial units)
are for reference only. Please use metric for precise measurements.
11-12
Revision June 2010
Chapter 11 Specifications
Order P/N: ASD-B2-1021;ASD-B2-1521(1kW ~ 1.5kW)
WEIGHT
1.72 (3.79)
NOTE
1) Dimensions are in millimeters (inches).
2) Weights are in kilograms (kg) and (pounds (lbs)).
3) In this manual, actual measured values are in metric units. Dimensions in (imperial units)
are for reference only. Please use metric for precise measurements.
Revision June 2010
11-13
Chapter 11 Specifications
Order P/N: ASD-B2-2023;ASD-B2-3023(2kW ~ 3kW)
WEIGHT
2.67 (5.88)
NOTE
1) Dimensions are in millimeters (inches).
2) Weights are in kilograms (kg) and (pounds (lbs)).
3) In this manual, actual measured values are in metric units. Dimensions in (imperial units)
are for reference only. Please use metric for precise measurements.
11-14
Revision June 2010
Chapter 11 Specifications
11.6 Dimensions of Servo Motor
Motor Frame Size: 86mm and below Models
Model
C20401□S C20602□S C20604□S C20804□S C20807□S C20907□S C20910□S
LC
40
60
60
80
80
86
86
LZ
4.5
5.5
5.5
6.6
6.6
6.6
6.6
LA
46
70
70
90
90
100
100
S
8( +−00.009)
14( +−00.011)
14( +−00.011)
14( +−00.011)
19( +−00.013)
16( +−00.011)
16( +−00.011)
LB
30( +−00.021)
50( +−00.025)
50( +−00.025)
70( +−00.030 )
70( +−00.030 )
80( +−00.030 )
80( +−00.030 )
LL (without
brake)
100.6
105.5
130.7
112.3
138.3
130.2
153.2
LL (with brake)
136.6
141.6
166.8
152.8
178
161.3
184.3
LS (without oil
seal)
20
27
27
27
32
30
30
LS (with oil seal)
20
24
24
24.5
29.5
30
30
LR
25
30
30
30
35
35
35
LE
2.5
3
3
3
3
3
3
LG
5
7.5
7.5
8
8
8
8
LW
16
20
20
20
25
20
20
RH
6.2
11
11
11
15.5
13
13
WK
3
5
5
5
6
5
5
W
3
5
5
5
6
5
5
T
3
M3
Depth 8
5
M4
Depth 15
5
M4
Depth 15
5
M4
Depth 15
6
M6
Depth 20
5
M5
Depth 15
5
M5
Depth 15
TP
NOTE
1) Dimensions are in millimeters.
2) Dimensions and weights of the servo motor may be revised without prior notice.
3) The boxes (…) in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section 1.2
for model explanation.)
4) Except ECMA-CM0604PS LL: 116.2mm, for the specifications of the motors with rotary
magnetic encoders, please refer to the specifications of the corresponding standard models.
Revision June 2010
11-15
Chapter 11 Specifications
Motor Frame Size: 100mm ~ 130mm Models
Model
G21303□S
E21305□S
G21306□S
G21309□S
C21010□S
LC
130
130
130
130
100
LZ
9
9
9
9
9
LA
145
145
145
145
115
S
22( +−00.013)
22( +−00.013)
22( +−00.013)
22( +−00.013)
22( +−00.013)
LB
110( +−00.035)
110( +−00.035)
110( +−00.035)
110( +−00.035)
95( +−00.035)
LL (without brake)
147.5
147.5
147.5
163.5
153.3
LL (with brake)
183.5
183.5
183.5
198
192.5
LS
47
47
47
47
37
LR
55
55
55
55
45
LE
6
6
6
6
5
LG
11.5
11.5
11.5
11.5
12
LW
36
36
36
36
32
RH
18
18
18
18
18
WK
8
8
8
8
8
W
8
8
8
8
8
T
7
M6
Depth 20
7
M6
Depth 20
7
M6
Depth 20
7
M6
Depth 20
7
M6
Depth 20
TP
NOTE
1) Dimensions are in millimeters.
2) Dimensions and weights of the servo motor may be revised without prior notice.
3) The boxes (…) in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section 1.2
for model explanation.)
4) For the specifications of the motors with rotary magnetic encoders, please refer to the
specifications of the corresponding standard models.
11-16
Revision June 2010
Chapter 11 Specifications
Motor Frame Size: 100mm ~ 130mm Models
Model
E21310□S
E21315□S
C21020□S
E21320□S
LC
130
130
100
130
LZ
9
9
9
9
LA
145
145
115
145
S
22( +−00.013)
22( +−00.013)
22( +−00.013)
22( +−00.013)
LB
110( +−00.035)
110( +−00.035)
95( +−00.035)
110( +−00.035)
LL (without brake)
147.5
167.5
199
187.5
LL (with brake)
183.5
202
226
216
LS
47
47
37
47
LR
55
55
45
55
LE
6
6
5
6
LG
11.5
11.5
12
11.5
LW
36
36
32
36
RH
18
18
18
18
WK
8
8
8
8
W
8
8
8
8
T
7
M6
Depth 20
7
M6
Depth 20
7
M6
Depth 20
7
M6
Depth 20
TP
NOTE
1) Dimensions are in millimeters.
2) Dimensions and weights of the servo motor may be revised without prior notice.
3) The boxes (…) in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section 1.2
for model explanation.)
Revision June 2010
11-17
Chapter 11 Specifications
Motor Frame Size: 180mm Models
Model
E21820□S
E21830□S
F21830□S
LC
180
180
180
LZ
13.5
13.5
13.5
LA
200
200
200
S
35( +−00.016)
35( +−00.016)
35( +−00.016)
LB
114.3( +−00.035)
114.3( +−00.035)
114.3( +−00.035)
LL (without brake)
169
202.1
202.1
LL (with brake)
203.1
235.3
235.3
LS
73
73
73
LR
79
79
79
LE
4
4
4
LG
20
20
20
LW
63
63
63
RH
30
30
30
WK
10
10
10
W
10
10
10
T
8
M12
Depth 25
8
M12
Depth 25
8
M12
Depth 25
TP
NOTE
1) Dimensions are in millimeters.
2) Dimensions and weights of the servo motor may be revised without prior notice.
3) The boxes (…) in the model names are for optional configurations. (Please refer to section 1.2
for model explanation.)
11-18
Revision June 2010
Appendix A Accessories
„
Power Connectors
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAPW0000
Title
Part No.
Manufacturer
Housing
C4201H00-2*2PA
JOWLE
Terminal
C4201TOP-2
JOWLE
Delta Part Number:ASDBCAPW0100
Title
Part No.
Manufacturer
Housing
C4201H00-2*3PA
JOWLE
Terminal
C4201TOP-2
JOWLE
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW1000
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW2000
Revision June 2010
A-1
Appendix A Accessories
„
Power Cables
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAPW0203/0205
Title
Part No.
Manufacturer
Housing
C4201H00-2*2PA
JOWLE
Terminal
C4201TOP-2
JOWLE
Title
Part No.
1
2
L
ASDBCAPW0203
mm
3000 ± 50
inch
118 ± 2
ASDBCAPW0205
5000 ± 50
197 ± 2
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAPW0303/0305
A-2
Title
Part No.
Manufacturer
Housing
C4201H00-2*3PA
JOWLE
Terminal
C4201TOP-2
JOWLE
Title
Part No.
1
2
L
ASDBCAPW0303
mm
3000 ± 50
inch
118 ± 2
ASDBCAPW0305
5000 ± 50
197 ± 2
Revision June 2010
Appendix A Accessories
„
Power Cables, cont.
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW1203/1205
Title
Part No.
Straight
1
ASD-CAPW1203
2
ASD-CAPW1205
L
3106A-20-18S
mm
3000 ± 50
inch
118 ± 2
3106A-20-18S
5000 ± 50
197 ± 2
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW1303/1305
Title
Part No.
Straight
1
ASD-CAPW1303
2
ASD-CAPW1305
L
3106A-20-18S
mm
3000 ± 50
inch
118 ± 2
3106A-20-18S
5000 ± 50
197 ± 2
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW2203/2205
Title
Part No.
Straight
1
ASD-CAPW2203
2
ASD-CAPW2205
Revision June 2010
L
3106A-24-11S
mm
3000 ± 50
inch
118 ± 2
3106A-24-11S
5000 ± 50
197 ± 2
A-3
Appendix A Accessories
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW2303/2305
„
Title
Part No.
Straight
1
ASD-CAPW2303
2
ASD-CAPW2305
L
3106A-24-11S
mm
3000 ± 50
inch
118 ± 2
3106A-24-11S
5000 ± 50
197 ± 2
Encoder Connectors
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAEN0000
Title
Part No.
Manufacturer
Housing
AMP (1-172161-9)
AMP
Terminal
AMP (170359-3)
AMP
CLAMP
DELTA (34703237XX)
DELTA
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAEN1000
A-4
Revision June 2010
Appendix A Accessories
„
Encoder Cables
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAEN0003/0005
Title
Part No.
Manufacturer
Housing
AMP (1-172161-9)
AMP
Terminal
AMP (170359-3)
AMP
CLAMP
DELTA (34703237XX)
DELTA
L
Title
Part No.
1
ASDBCAEN0003
mm
3000 ± 50
inch
118 ±2
2
ASDBCAEN0005
5000 ± 50
197 ± 2
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAEN1003/1005
Title
Part No.
Straight
1
ASDBCAEN1003
2
ASDBCAEN1005
Revision June 2010
L
3106A-20-29S
mm
3000 ± 50
inch
118 ± 2
3106A-20-29S
5000 ± 50
197 ± 2
A-5
Appendix A Accessories
I/O Signal Connector (CN1)
„
Delta Part Number: ASDBCNDS0044
Communication Cable between Drive and Computer (for PC)
„
Delta Part Number: ASD-CARS0003
L
Title
Part No.
1
ASD-CARS0003
mm
3000 ± 100
inch
118 ±4
„ Servo Drive, Servo Motor and Accessories Combinations
100W Servo Drive and 100W Low Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-0121-B
Low inertia
ECMA-C20401□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake
3M
Cable
Connector
A-6
With Brake
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASDBCAPW0203
ASDBCAPW0205
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN0003
ASDBCAEN0005
3M
5M
-
-
-
-
Power Connector ASDBCAPW0000
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN0000
Revision June 2010
Appendix A Accessories
200W Servo Drive and 200W Low Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-0221-B
Low inertia
ECMA-C20602□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake
3M
Cable
Connector
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASDBCAPW0203
ASDBCAPW0205
ASDBCAPW0303
ASDBCAPW0305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN0003
ASDBCAEN0005
ASDBCAEN0003
ASDBCAEN0005
Power Connector ASDBCAPW0000
Power Connector ASDBCAPW0100
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN0000
400W Servo Drive and 400W Low Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-0421-B
ECMA-C20604□S
Low inertia
ECMA-CM0604PS
Servo Motor
ECMA-C20804□7
Without Brake
3M
Cable
Connector
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASDBCAPW0203
ASDBCAPW0205
ASDBCAPW0303
ASDBCAPW0305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN0003
ASDBCAEN0005
ASDBCAEN0003
ASDBCAEN0005
Power Connector ASDBCAPW0000
Power Connector ASDBCAPW0100
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN0000
400W Servo Drive and 500W Medium Inertia Servo Motor
Medium inertia
ECMA-E21305□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake
3M
Cable
Connector
Revision June 2010
Without Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASD-CAPW1203
ASD-CAPW1205
ASD-CAPW1303
ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000
A-7
Appendix A Accessories
400W Servo Drive and 300W High Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-0421-B
High inertia
ECMA-G21303□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake
3M
Cable
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASD-CAPW1203
ASD-CAPW1205
ASD-CAPW1303
ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000
750W Servo Drive and 750W Low Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-0721-B
Low inertia
ECMA-C20807□S
Servo Motor
ECMA-C20907□S
Without Brake
3M
Cable
Connector
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASDBCAPW0203
ASDBCAPW0205
ASDBCAPW0303
ASDBCAPW0305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN0003
ASDBCAEN0005
ASDBCAEN0003
ASDBCAEN0005
Power Connector ASDBCAPW0000
Power Connector ASDBCAPW0100
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN0000
750W Servo Drive and 600W High Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-0721-B
High inertia
ECMA-G21306□S
Servo Motor
ECMA-GM1306PS
Without Brake
3M
Cable
Connector
A-8
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASD-CAPW1203
ASD-CAPW1205
ASD-CAPW1303
ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000
Revision June 2010
Appendix A Accessories
1kW Servo Drive and 1kW Low Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-1021-B
Low inertia
ECMA-C21010□S
Servo Motor
ECMA-C20910□S
Without Brake
3M
Cable
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASD-CAPW1203
ASD-CAPW1205
ASD-CAPW1303
ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASDBCAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000
1kW Servo Drive and 1kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-1021-B
Medium inertia
ECMA-E21310□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake
3M
Cable
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASD-CAPW1203
ASD-CAPW1205
ASD-CAPW1303
ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000
1kW Servo Drive and 900W High Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-1021-B
High inertia
ECMA-G21309□S
Servo Motor
ECMA-GM1309PS
Without Brake
3M
Cable
Connector
Revision June 2010
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASD-CAPW1203
ASD-CAPW1205
ASD-CAPW1303
ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000
A-9
Appendix A Accessories
1.5kW Servo Drive and 1.5kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-1521-B
Medium inertia
ECMA-E21315□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake
3M
Cable
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASD-CAPW1203
ASD-CAPW1205
ASD-CAPW1303
ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000
2kW Servo Drive and 2kW Low Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-2023-B
Low inertia
ECMA-C21020□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake
3M
Cable
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASD-CAPW1203
ASD-CAPW1205
ASD-CAPW1303
ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000
2kW Servo Drive and 2kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-2023-B
Medium inertia
ECMA-E21320□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake
3M
Cable
Connector
A-10
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASD-CAPW1203
ASD-CAPW1205
ASD-CAPW1303
ASD-CAPW1305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000
Revision June 2010
Appendix A Accessories
2kW Servo Drive and 2kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-2023-B
Medium inertia
ECMA-E21820□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake
3M
Cable
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASD-CAPW2203
ASD-CAPW2205
ASD-CAPW2303
ASD-CAPW2305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW2000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000
3kW Servo Drive and 3kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-3023-B
Medium inertia
ECMA-E21830□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake
3M
Cable
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASD-CAPW2203
ASD-CAPW2205
ASD-CAPW2303
ASD-CAPW2305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW2000
Connector
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000
3kW Servo Drive and 3kW Medium Inertia Servo Motor
Servo Drive
ASD-B2-3023-B
Medium inertia
ECMA-F21830□S
Servo Motor
Without Brake
3M
Cable
Connector
Revision June 2010
With Brake
5M
3M
5M
Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable Motor Power Cable
ASD-CAPW2203
ASD-CAPW2205
ASD-CAPW2303
ASD-CAPW2305
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
Encoder Cable
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
ASDBCAEN1003
ASDBCAEN1005
Power Connector ASD-CAPW2000
Encoder Connector ASDBCAEN1000
A-11
Appendix A Accessories
Other Accessories (for ASDA-B2 series all models)
Description
Communication Cable between Drive and
Computer (for PC)
Regenerative Resistor 400W 100Ω
Delta Part Number
Regenerative Resistor 3kW 10Ω
BR1K0W020
ASD-CARS0003
BR400W040
NOTE
1) The boxes (…) at the ends of the servo drive model names are for optional configurations (Full
closed-loop, CANopen and extension DI port). For the actual model name, please refer to the
ordering information of the actual purchased product.
2) The boxes (…) in the servo motor model names are for optional configurations (keyway, brake
and oil seal).
A-12
Revision June 2010
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement